gtkmm r1091 - in trunk: . gtk/gtkmm gtk/src
- From: murrayc svn gnome org
- To: svn-commits-list gnome org
- Subject: gtkmm r1091 - in trunk: . gtk/gtkmm gtk/src
- Date: Thu, 5 Feb 2009 17:56:53 +0000 (UTC)
Author: murrayc
Date: Thu Feb 5 17:56:53 2009
New Revision: 1091
URL: http://svn.gnome.org/viewvc/gtkmm?rev=1091&view=rev
Log:
2009-02-05 Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>
* gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml: Regenerated with docextract_to_xml.py,
removing some /* and */.
* gtk/gtkmm/accelmap.h: Unescaped < and > characters in documentation,
fixing bug #568485
* gtk/src/action.hg: Added block_activate() and unblock_activate(),
deprecating block_activate_from() and unblock_activate_from() because
that is what happened in the C API.
Modified:
trunk/ChangeLog
trunk/gtk/gtkmm/accelmap.h
trunk/gtk/src/action.hg
trunk/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
Modified: trunk/gtk/gtkmm/accelmap.h
==============================================================================
--- trunk/gtk/gtkmm/accelmap.h (original)
+++ trunk/gtk/gtkmm/accelmap.h Thu Feb 5 17:56:53 2009
@@ -41,15 +41,15 @@
* with the canonical accel_key and accel_mods for this path.
* To change the accelerator during runtime programatically, use
* change_entry().
- * The accelerator path must consist of "<WINDOWTYPE>/Category1/Category2/.../Action",
- * where <WINDOWTYPE> should be a unique application-specific identifier, that
+ * The accelerator path must consist of "<WINDOWTYPE>/Category1/Category2/.../Action",
+ * where <WINDOWTYPE> should be a unique application-specific identifier, that
* corresponds to the kind of window the accelerator is being used in, e.g. "Gimp-Image",
* "Abiword-Document" or "Gnumeric-Settings".
* The Category1/.../Action portion is most appropriately chosen by the action the
* accelerator triggers, i.e. for accelerators on menu items, choose the item's menu path,
* e.g. "File/Save As", "Image/View/Zoom" or "Edit/Select All".
* So a full valid accelerator path may look like:
- * "<Gimp-Toolbox>/File/Dialogs/Tool Options...".
+ * "<Gimp-Toolbox>/File/Dialogs/Tool Options...".
*
* @param accel_path valid accelerator path
* @param accel_key the accelerator key
Modified: trunk/gtk/src/action.hg
==============================================================================
--- trunk/gtk/src/action.hg (original)
+++ trunk/gtk/src/action.hg Thu Feb 5 17:56:53 2009
@@ -202,6 +202,9 @@
_WRAP_METHOD(void set_is_important(bool is_important = true), gtk_action_set_is_important)
_WRAP_METHOD(bool get_is_important() const, gtk_action_get_is_important)
+ _WRAP_METHOD(void block_activate(), gtk_action_block_activate)
+ _WRAP_METHOD(void unblock_activate(), gtk_action_unblock_activate)
+
//gtk_action_get_accel_closure() is too C-specific:
_IGNORE(gtk_action_get_accel_closure)
@@ -224,9 +227,8 @@
protected:
//For use by child actions:
- _WRAP_METHOD(void block_activate_from(Widget& proxy), gtk_action_block_activate_from)
- _WRAP_METHOD(void unblock_activate_from(Widget& proxy), gtk_action_unblock_activate_from)
-
+ _WRAP_METHOD(void block_activate_from(Widget& proxy), gtk_action_block_activate_from, deprecated "Activatables are now responsible for activating the action directly so this doesnt apply anymore")
+ _WRAP_METHOD(void unblock_activate_from(Widget& proxy), gtk_action_unblock_activate_from, deprecated "Activatables are now responsible for activating the action directly so this doesnt apply anymore")
protected:
//Widget-creation routines:
Modified: trunk/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
==============================================================================
--- trunk/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml (original)
+++ trunk/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml Thu Feb 5 17:56:53 2009
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@
The "changed" signal of the first radio action is connected to the
@on_change callback and the accel paths of the actions are set to
-&lt;literal&gt;&lt;Actions&gt;/&lt;replaceable&gt;group-name&lt;/replaceable&gt;/&lt;replaceable&gt;action-name&lt;/replaceable&gt;&lt;/literal&gt;.
+<literal><Actions>/<replaceable>group-name</replaceable>/<replaceable>action-name</replaceable></literal>.
Since: 2.4
@@ -174,18 +174,27 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_base_folder">
+<function name="GtkPrintOperationPreview">
<description>
-Sets the folder with respect to which completions occur.
+The ::got-page-size signal is emitted once for each page
+that gets rendered to the preview.
+
+A handler for this signal should update the @context
+according to @page_setup and set up a suitable cairo
+context, using gtk_print_context_set_cairo_context().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser_entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
+<parameter name="preview">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="file">
-<parameter_description> file for a folder in the chooser entries current file system.
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the current #GtkPrintContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_setup">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkPageSetup for the current page
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -228,11 +237,27 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_ref">
+<description>
+Increments the reference count on @icon_set.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> @icon_set.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkButton containing a label.
If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
-If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
+If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
accelerator called a mnemonic.
Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
@@ -280,6 +305,50 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_draw_slider">
+<description>
+Draws a slider in the given rectangle on @window using the
+given style and orientation.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+ @window: a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> a shadow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the orientation to be used
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_manager_lookup_item">
<description>
Searches for a URI inside the recently used resources list, and
@@ -309,9 +378,38 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_at_pos">
+<description>
+Finds the icon at the given position and return its index.
+If @x, @y doesn't lie inside an icon, -1 is returned.
+This function is intended for use in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
+signal handler.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate of the position to find
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate of the position to find
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the index of the icon at the given position, or -1
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_dialog_set_default_response">
<description>
-Sets the last widget in the dialog's action area with the given @response_id
+Sets the last widget in the dialog's action area with the given @response_id
as the default widget for the dialog. Pressing "Enter" normally activates
the default widget.
@@ -385,12 +483,12 @@
This function tells GTK+ that the user interface for your
application requires users to read across tree rows and associate
cells with one another. By default, GTK+ will then render the tree
-with alternating row colors. Do &lt;emphasis&gt;not&lt;/emphasis&gt; use it
-just because you prefer the appearance of the ruled tree; that's a
+with alternating row colors. Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> use it
+just because you prefer the appearance of the ruled tree; that's a
question for the theme. Some themes will draw tree rows in
alternating colors even when rules are turned off, and users who
prefer that appearance all the time can choose those themes. You
-should call this function only as a &lt;emphasis&gt;semantic&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+should call this function only as a <emphasis>semantic</emphasis>
hint to the theme engine that your tree makes alternating colors
useful from a functional standpoint (since it has lots of columns,
generally).
@@ -559,17 +657,11 @@
<function name="GtkTextBuffer">
<description>
-The ::end-user-action signal is emitted at the end of a single
-user-visible operation #GtkTextBuffer.
+The paste-done signal is emitted after paste operation has been completed.
+This is useful to properly scroll the view to the end of the pasted text.
+See gtk_text_buffer_paste_clipboard() for more details.
-See also:
-gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(),
-gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive(),
-gtk_text_buffer_insert_range_interactive(),
-gtk_text_buffer_delete_interactive(),
-gtk_text_buffer_backspace(),
-gtk_text_buffer_delete_selection(),
-gtk_text_buffer_backspace().
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -583,7 +675,7 @@
<function name="gtk_window_set_default_size">
<description>
-Sets the default size of a window. If the window's "natural" size
+Sets the default size of a window. If the window's "natural" size
(its size request) is larger than the default, the default will be
ignored. More generally, if the default size does not obey the
geometry hints for the window (gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can
@@ -597,7 +689,7 @@
again as they normally would. Setting a default size of -1 means to
use the "natural" default size (the size request of the window).
-For more control over a window's initial size and how resizing works,
+For more control over a window's initial size and how resizing works,
investigate gtk_window_set_geometry_hints().
For some uses, gtk_window_resize() is a more appropriate function.
@@ -609,7 +701,7 @@
shown; if a window is hidden and re-shown, it will remember the size
it had prior to hiding, rather than using the default size.
-Windows can't actually be 0x0 in size, they must be at least 1x1, but
+Windows can't actually be 0x0 in size, they must be at least 1x1, but
passing 0 for @width and @height is OK, resulting in a 1x1 default size.
</description>
@@ -720,7 +812,7 @@
will be modal. You can force gtk_dialog_run() to return at any time by
calling gtk_dialog_response() to emit the ::response signal. Destroying
the dialog during gtk_dialog_run() is a very bad idea, because your
-post-run code won't know whether the dialog was destroyed or not.
+post-run code won't know whether the dialog was destroyed or not.
After gtk_dialog_run() returns, you are responsible for hiding or
destroying the dialog if you wish to do so.
@@ -743,7 +835,7 @@
Note that even though the recursive main loop gives the effect of a
modal dialog (it prevents the user from interacting with other
windows in the same window group while the dialog is run), callbacks
-such as timeouts, IO channel watches, DND drops, etc, &lt;emphasis&gt;will&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+such as timeouts, IO channel watches, DND drops, etc, <emphasis>will</emphasis>
be triggered during a gtk_dialog_run() call.
@@ -769,6 +861,25 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_set_draw_value">
+<description>
+Specifies whether the current value is displayed as a string next
+to the slider.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="draw_value">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to draw the value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_items">
<description>
Gets the list of recently used resources in form of #GtkRecentInfo objects.
@@ -794,9 +905,13 @@
<function name="gtk_editable_select_region">
<description>
-Selects the text between @start and @end. Both @start and @end are
-relative to the start of the content. Note that positions are specified
-in characters, not bytes.
+Selects a region of text. The characters that are selected are
+those characters at positions from @start_pos up to, but not
+including @end_pos. If @end_pos is negative, then the the
+characters selected are those characters from @start_pos to
+the end of the text.
+
+Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -804,11 +919,11 @@
<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
+<parameter name="start_pos">
<parameter_description> start of region
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
+<parameter name="end_pos">
<parameter_description> end of region
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -816,20 +931,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new">
+<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_base_folder">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkComboBoxEntry which has a #GtkEntry as child. After
-construction, you should set a model using gtk_combo_box_set_model() and a
-text column using gtk_combo_box_entry_set_text_column().
-
+Sets the folder with respect to which completions occur.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser_entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="file">
+<parameter_description> file for a folder in the chooser entries current file system.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkComboBoxEntry.
-
-Since: 2.4
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="GtkMountOperation">
@@ -848,7 +965,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_delete_interactive">
<description>
-Deletes all &lt;emphasis&gt;editable&lt;/emphasis&gt; text in the given range.
+Deletes all <emphasis>editable</emphasis> text in the given range.
Calls gtk_text_buffer_delete() for each editable sub-range of
[ start,@end). @start and @end are revalidated to point to
the location of the last deleted range, or left untouched if
@@ -1007,7 +1124,7 @@
<description>
Sets whether the button will grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
-you don't want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
+you don't want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
application.
Since: 2.10
@@ -1386,7 +1503,7 @@
#GtkFileChooser. A #GtkParamSpecOverride property is installed
for each property, using the values from the #GtkFileChooserProp
enumeration. The caller must make sure itself that the enumeration
-values don't collide with some other property values they
+values don't collide with some other property values they
are using.
</description>
@@ -1441,7 +1558,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_map">
<description>
This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
-a widget to be mapped if it isn't already.
+a widget to be mapped if it isn't already.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -1563,7 +1680,7 @@
<description>
Sets the contents of the selection from a list of URIs.
The string is converted to the form determined by
- selection_data-&gt;target.
+ selection_data->target.
</description>
@@ -1587,7 +1704,7 @@
<function name="gtk_paper_size_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object by parsing a
-&lt;ulink url="ftp://ftp.pwg.org/pub/pwg/candidates/cs-pwgmsn10-20020226-5101.1.pdf"&gt;PWG 5101.1-2002&lt;/ulink&gt;
+<ulink url="ftp://ftp.pwg.org/pub/pwg/candidates/cs-pwgmsn10-20020226-5101.1.pdf">PWG 5101.1-2002</ulink>
paper name.
If @name is %NULL, the default paper size is returned,
@@ -1757,11 +1874,11 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> place to store an icon name
+<parameter_description> place to store an icon name, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> place to store an icon size
+<parameter_description> place to store an icon size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -1772,7 +1889,7 @@
<description>
Usually used to find out which window an event corresponds to.
If you connect to an event signal on @text_view, this function
-should be called on &lt;literal&gt;event-&gt;window&lt;/literal&gt; to
+should be called on <literal>event->window</literal> to
see which window it was.
@@ -1810,7 +1927,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_indent">
<description>
Gets the default indentation of paragraphs in @text_view.
-Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
+Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
The indentation may be negative.
@@ -1872,7 +1989,7 @@
Moves @count visible lines backward, if possible (if @count would move
past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
-onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
+onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
moves forward by 0 - @count lines.
@@ -1975,7 +2092,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_unmap">
<description>
This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
-a widget to be unmapped if it's currently mapped.
+a widget to be unmapped if it's currently mapped.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2248,9 +2365,9 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_func">
<description>
-Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be @sort_func. If the
-current sort column id of @sortable is the same as @sort_column_id, then the
-model will sort using this function.
+Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be @sort_func. If the
+current sort column id of @sortable is the same as @sort_column_id, then
+the model will sort using this function.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2378,6 +2495,37 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_style_get_valist">
+<description>
+Non-vararg variant of gtk_style_get().
+Used primarily by language bindings.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> the #GType of a descendant of #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first style property to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="var_args">
+<parameter_description> a <type>va_list</type> of pairs of property names and
+locations to return the property values, starting with the
+location for @first_property_name.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_label_get_attributes">
<description>
Gets the attribute list that was set on the label using
@@ -2458,10 +2606,10 @@
<function name="gtk_action_group_set_translation_domain">
<description>
Sets the translation domain and uses g_dgettext() for translating the
- label and @tooltip of #GtkActionEntry&lt;!-- --&gt;s added by
+ label and @tooltip of #GtkActionEntry<!-- -->s added by
gtk_action_group_add_actions().
-If you're not using gettext() for localization, see
+If you're not using gettext() for localization, see
gtk_action_group_set_translate_func().
Since: 2.4
@@ -2544,6 +2692,30 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_activatable">
+<description>
+Sets whether the icon is activatable.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the icon should be activatable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_color_button_get_color">
<description>
Sets @color to be the current color in the #GtkColorButton widget.
@@ -2581,9 +2753,9 @@
<function name="gtk_label_set_use_markup">
<description>
-Sets whether the text of the label contains markup in &lt;link
-linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango's text markup
-language&lt;/link&gt;. See gtk_label_set_markup().
+Sets whether the text of the label contains markup in <link
+linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango's text markup
+language</link>. See gtk_label_set_markup().
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -2592,7 +2764,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the label's text should be parsed for markup.
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the label's text should be parsed for markup.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -2622,11 +2794,11 @@
Sets the event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for a widget. The event
mask determines which events a widget will receive. Keep in mind
that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
-changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget's functionality,
+changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget's functionality,
so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
unrealized. Consider gtk_widget_add_events() for widgets that are
already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
-mask. This function can't be used with #GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets;
+mask. This function can't be used with #GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets;
to get events on those widgets, place them inside a #GtkEventBox
and receive events on the event box.
@@ -2648,7 +2820,7 @@
<description>
Deletes the range between the "insert" and "selection_bound" marks,
that is, the currently-selected text. If @interactive is %TRUE,
-the editability of the selection will be considered (users can't delete
+the editability of the selection will be considered (users can't delete
uneditable text).
@@ -2735,7 +2907,7 @@
<function name="gtk_drag_set_icon_widget">
<description>
Changes the icon for a widget to a given widget. GTK+
-will not destroy the icon, so if you don't want
+will not destroy the icon, so if you don't want
it to persist, you should connect to the "drag-end"
signal and destroy it yourself.
@@ -2787,6 +2959,30 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_mnemonic_activate">
+<description>
+Emits the #GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal.
+
+The default handler for this signal activates the @widget if
+ group_cycling is %FALSE, and just grabs the focus if @group_cycling
+is %TRUE.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_cycling">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the signal has been handled
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_has_tooltip">
<description>
Sets the has-tooltip property on @widget to @has_tooltip. See
@@ -2808,6 +3004,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_label">
+<description>
+Sets @text on the @menu_item label
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The text in the @menu_item label. This is the internal
+string used by the label, and must not be modified.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_remove_mnemonic">
<description>
Removes a mnemonic from this window.
@@ -2846,7 +3061,7 @@
use #GtkUIManager, setting up accelerator paths will be done
automatically.
-Even when you you aren't using #GtkUIManager, if you only want to
+Even when you you aren't using #GtkUIManager, if you only want to
set up accelerators on menu items gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()
provides a somewhat more convenient interface.
@@ -2875,7 +3090,7 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_set_screen">
<description>
Sets the screen for an icon theme; the screen is used
-to track the user's currently configured icon theme,
+to track the user's currently configured icon theme,
which might be different for different screens.
Since: 2.4
@@ -3074,7 +3289,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_justification">
<description>
Sets the default justification of text in @text_view.
-Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
+Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
</description>
@@ -3095,7 +3310,7 @@
<description>
Converts from a position in the entry contents (returned
by gtk_entry_get_text()) to a position in the
-entry's #PangoLayout (returned by gtk_entry_get_layout(),
+entry's #PangoLayout (returned by gtk_entry_get_layout(),
with text retrieved via pango_layout_get_text()).
@@ -3153,7 +3368,7 @@
<function name="gtk_message_dialog_get_image">
<description>
-Gets the dialog's image.
+Gets the dialog's image.
</description>
@@ -3163,7 +3378,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the dialog's image
+<return> the dialog's image
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -3171,12 +3386,12 @@
<function name="gtk_window_unmaximize">
<description>
-Asks to unmaximize @window. Note that you shouldn't assume the
+Asks to unmaximize @window. Note that you shouldn't assume the
window is definitely unmaximized afterward, because other entities
-(e.g. the user or &lt;link linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window
-manager&lt;/link&gt;) could maximize it again, and not all window
+(e.g. the user or <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window
+manager</link>) could maximize it again, and not all window
managers honor requests to unmaximize. But normally the window will
-end up unmaximized. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
+end up unmaximized. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
You can track maximization via the "window-state-event" signal
on #GtkWidget.
@@ -3248,6 +3463,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_enable_tree_lines">
+<description>
+Sets whether to draw lines interconnecting the expanders in @tree_view.
+This does not have any visible effects for lists.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="enabled">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable tree line drawing, %FALSE otherwise.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_invisible_new_for_screen">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkInvisible object for a specified screen
@@ -3361,7 +3597,7 @@
"in between" display. Normally you would turn off the inconsistent
state again if the user explicitly selects a setting. This has to be
done manually, gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent() only affects
-visual appearance, it doesn't affect the semantics of the widget.
+visual appearance, it doesn't affect the semantics of the widget.
</description>
@@ -3452,20 +3688,38 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_ref">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport">
<description>
-Increments the reference count on @icon_set.
-
+Used to add children without native scrolling capabilities. This
+is simply a convenience function; it is equivalent to adding the
+unscrollable child to a viewport, then adding the viewport to the
+scrolled window. If a child has native scrolling, use
+gtk_container_add() instead of this function.
+
+The viewport scrolls the child by moving its #GdkWindow, and takes
+the size of the child to be the size of its toplevel #GdkWindow.
+This will be very wrong for most widgets that support native scrolling;
+for example, if you add a widget such as #GtkTreeView with a viewport,
+the whole widget will scroll, including the column headings. Thus,
+widgets with native scrolling support should not be used with the
+#GtkViewport proxy.
+
+A widget supports scrolling natively if the
+set_scroll_adjustments_signal field in #GtkWidgetClass is non-zero,
+i.e. has been filled in with a valid signal identifier.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet.
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the widget you want to scroll
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> @icon_set.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_mime_type">
@@ -3493,7 +3747,7 @@
release event) in the middle of the first GdkWindow found that belongs
to @widget.
For %GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets like GtkButton, this will often be an
-input-only event window. For other widgets, this is usually widget-&gt;window.
+input-only event window. For other widgets, this is usually widget->window.
Certain caveats should be considered when using this function, in
particular because the mouse pointer is warped to the button click
location, see gdk_test_simulate_button() for details.
@@ -3828,7 +4082,7 @@
<function name="gtk_drag_dest_find_target">
<description>
-Looks for a match between @context-&gt;targets and the
+Looks for a match between @context->targets and the
@dest_target_list, returning the first matching target, otherwise
returning %GDK_NONE. @dest_target_list should usually be the return
value from gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list(), but some widgets may
@@ -3955,6 +4209,117 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkIMContextClass">
+<description>
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="preedit_start">
+<parameter_description> Default handler of the #GtkIMContext::preedit-start signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="preedit_end">
+<parameter_description> Default handler of the #GtkIMContext::preedit-end signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="preedit_changed">
+<parameter_description> Default handler of the #GtkIMContext::preedit-changed
+signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="commit">
+<parameter_description> Default handler of the #GtkIMContext::commit signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="retrieve_surrounding">
+<parameter_description> Default handler of the
+#GtkIMContext::retrieve-surrounding signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="delete_surrounding">
+<parameter_description> Default handler of the
+#GtkIMContext::delete-surrounding signal.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="set_client_window">
+<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_set_client_window() when the
+input window where the entered text will appear changes. Override this to
+keep track of the current input window, for instance for the purpose of
+positioning a status display of your input method.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="get_preedit_string">
+<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_get_preedit_string() to
+retrieve the text currently being preedited for display at the cursor
+position. Any input method which composes complex characters or any
+other compositions from multiple sequential key presses should override
+this method to provide feedback.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filter_keypress">
+<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_filter_keypress() on every
+key press or release event. Every non-trivial input method needs to
+override this in order to implement the mapping from key events to text.
+A return value of %TRUE indicates to the caller that the event was
+consumed by the input method. In that case, the #GtkIMContext::commit
+signal should be emitted upon completion of a key sequence to pass the
+resulting text back to the input widget. Alternatively, %FALSE may be
+returned to indicate that the event wasn't handled by the input method.
+If a builtin mapping exists for the key, it is used to produce a
+character.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="focus_in">
+<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_focus_in() when the input widget
+has gained focus. May be overridden to keep track of the current focus.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="focus_out">
+<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_focus_in() when the input widget
+has lost focus. May be overridden to keep track of the current focus.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="reset">
+<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_reset() to signal a change such as a
+change in cursor position. An input method that implements preediting
+should override this method to clear the preedit state on reset.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="set_cursor_location">
+<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_set_cursor_location()
+to inform the input method of the current cursor location relative to
+the client window. May be overridden to implement the display of popup
+windows at the cursor position.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="set_use_preedit">
+<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_set_use_preedit() to control
+the use of the preedit string. Override this to display feedback by some
+other means if turned off.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="set_surrounding">
+<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_set_surrounding() in response
+to signal #GtkIMContext::retrieve-surrounding to update the input
+method's idea of the context around the cursor. It is not necessary to
+override this method even with input methods which implement
+context-dependent behavior. The base implementation is sufficient for
+gtk_im_context_get_surrounding() to work.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="get_surrounding">
+<parameter_description> Called via gtk_im_context_get_surrounding() to update
+the context around the cursor location. It is not necessary to override
+this method even with input methods which implement context-dependent
+behavior. The base implementation emits
+#GtkIMContext::retrieve-surrounding and records the context received
+by the subsequent invocation of @get_surrounding.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_set_text_column">
<description>
Sets the model column which @entry_box should use to get strings from
@@ -3998,6 +4363,31 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_sensitive">
+<description>
+Sets the sensitivity for the specified icon.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sensitive">
+<parameter_description> Specifies whether the icon should appear
+sensitive or insensitive
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_popup_set_width">
<description>
Sets whether the completion popup window will be resized to be the same
@@ -4084,7 +4474,7 @@
<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_title">
<description>
-Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.
+Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.
Since: 2.10
@@ -4231,6 +4621,7 @@
<description>
Sets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
for the scrolled window.
+
The default is %GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT, meaning the child is
in the top left, with the scrollbars underneath and to the right.
Other values in #GtkCornerType are %GTK_CORNER_TOP_RIGHT,
@@ -4336,7 +4727,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the box' orientation.
+<parameter_description> the box' orientation.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="homogeneous">
@@ -4425,6 +4816,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_menu_item_set_use_underline">
+<description>
+If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
+used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_app_paintable">
<description>
Sets whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
@@ -4433,7 +4845,7 @@
This is a hint to the widget and does not affect the behavior of
the GTK+ core; many widgets ignore this flag entirely. For widgets
that do pay attention to the flag, such as #GtkEventBox and #GtkWindow,
-the effect is to suppress default themed drawing of the widget's
+the effect is to suppress default themed drawing of the widget's
background. (Children of the widget will still be drawn.) The application
is then entirely responsible for drawing the widget background.
@@ -4442,7 +4854,7 @@
window using an RGBA visual), you can work around this by doing:
|[
gtk_widget_realize (window);
-gdk_window_set_back_pixmap (window-&gt;window, NULL, FALSE);
+gdk_window_set_back_pixmap (window->window, NULL, FALSE);
gtk_widget_show (window);
]|
@@ -4501,7 +4913,7 @@
<description>
Creates a new icon theme object. Icon theme objects are used
to lookup up an icon by name in a particular icon theme.
-Usually, you'll want to use gtk_icon_theme_get_default()
+Usually, you'll want to use gtk_icon_theme_get_default()
or gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen() rather than creating
a new icon theme object for scratch.
@@ -4527,29 +4939,60 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_style_get">
+<description>
+Gets the values of a multiple style properties for @widget_type
+from @style.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> the #GType of a descendant of #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first style property to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> pairs of property names and locations to
+return the property values, starting with the location for
+ first_property_name, terminated by %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_hsv_set_color">
<description>
-Sets the current color in an HSV color selector. Color component values must
-be in the [0.0, 1.0] range.
+Sets the current color in an HSV color selector.
+Color component values must be in the [0.0, 1.0] range.
Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="hsv">
-<parameter_description> An HSV color selector.
+<parameter_description> An HSV color selector
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="h">
-<parameter_description> Hue.
+<parameter_description> Hue
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="s">
-<parameter_description> Saturation.
+<parameter_description> Saturation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="v">
-<parameter_description> Value.
+<parameter_description> Value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -4593,8 +5036,8 @@
<function name="gtk_tooltip_set_markup">
<description>
Sets the text of the tooltip to be @markup, which is marked up
-with the &lt;link
-linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text markup language&lt;/link&gt;.
+with the <link
+linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
If @markup is %NULL, the label will be hidden.
Since: 2.12
@@ -4606,7 +5049,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description> a markup string (see &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango markup format&lt;/link&gt;) or %NULL
+<parameter_description> a markup string (see <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>) or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -4616,9 +5059,9 @@
<function name="gtk_style_get_font">
<description>
Gets the #GdkFont to use for the given style. This is
-meant only as a replacement for direct access to @style-&gt;font
+meant only as a replacement for direct access to @style->font
and should not be used in new code. New code should
-use @style-&gt;font_desc instead.
+use @style->font_desc instead.
</description>
@@ -4656,8 +5099,8 @@
<function name="gtk_builder_add_from_file">
<description>
-Parses a file containing a &lt;link linkend="BUILDER-UI"&gt;GtkBuilder
-UI definition&lt;/link&gt; and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
+Parses a file containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
+UI definition</link> and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
</description>
@@ -4688,7 +5131,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -4701,7 +5144,7 @@
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label">
<description>
Changes the tab label for @child. If %NULL is specified
-for @tab_label, then the page will have the label 'page N'.
+for @tab_label, then the page will have the label 'page N'.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -5008,7 +5451,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> binding set to add a path to
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to add a path to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="path_type">
@@ -5072,7 +5515,7 @@
Moves @count lines backward, if possible (if @count would move
past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
-onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
+onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
moves forward by 0 - @count lines.
@@ -5095,7 +5538,7 @@
<function name="gtk_show_about_dialog">
<description>
-This is a convenience function for showing an application's about box.
+This is a convenience function for showing an application's about box.
The constructed dialog is associated with the parent window and
reused for future invocations of this function.
@@ -5151,7 +5594,7 @@
<function name="gtk_rc_parse_color">
<description>
-Parses a color in the &lt;link linkend="color=format"&gt;format&lt;/link&gt; expected
+Parses a color in the <link linkend="color=format">format</link> expected
in a RC file.
Note that theme engines should use gtk_rc_parse_color_full() in
@@ -5192,6 +5635,42 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_unblock_activate">
+<description>
+Reenable activation signals from the action
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_action_set_tooltip">
+<description>
+Sets the tooltip text on @action
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> the tooltip text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_printer">
<description>
Convenience function to obtain the value of
@@ -5214,7 +5693,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_store_insert_after">
<description>
Inserts a new row after @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will be
-prepended to @parent 's children. If @parent and @sibling are %NULL, then
+prepended to @parent 's children. If @parent and @sibling are %NULL, then
the row will be prepended to the toplevel. If both @sibling and @parent are
set, then @parent must be the parent of @sibling. When @sibling is set,
@parent is optional.
@@ -5357,9 +5836,9 @@
in. Note that only types derived from standard GObject fundamental types
are supported.
-As an example, &lt;literal&gt;gtk_tree_store_new (3, G_TYPE_INT, G_TYPE_STRING,
-GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF);&lt;/literal&gt; will create a new #GtkTreeStore with three columns, of type
-&lt;type&gt;int&lt;/type&gt;, &lt;type&gt;string&lt;/type&gt; and #GdkPixbuf respectively.
+As an example, <literal>gtk_tree_store_new (3, G_TYPE_INT, G_TYPE_STRING,
+GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF);</literal> will create a new #GtkTreeStore with three columns, of type
+<type>int</type>, <type>string</type> and #GdkPixbuf respectively.
</description>
@@ -5413,8 +5892,8 @@
<description>
Starts moving a window. This function is used if an application has
window movement grips. When GDK can support it, the window movement
-will be done using the standard mechanism for the &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt; or windowing
+will be done using the standard mechanism for the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> or windowing
system. Otherwise, GDK will try to emulate window movement,
potentially not all that well, depending on the windowing system.
@@ -5450,8 +5929,8 @@
Finds the path at the point (@x, @y), relative to bin_window coordinates
(please see gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window()).
That is, @x and @y are relative to an events coordinates. @x and @y must
-come from an event on the @tree_view only where &lt;literal&gt;event-&gt;window ==
-gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window (&lt;!-- --&gt;)&lt;/literal&gt;. It is primarily for
+come from an event on the @tree_view only where <literal>event->window ==
+gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window (<!-- -->)</literal>. It is primarily for
things like popup menus. If @path is non-%NULL, then it will be filled
with the #GtkTreePath at that point. This path should be freed with
gtk_tree_path_free(). If @column is non-%NULL, then it will be filled
@@ -5606,7 +6085,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkWidget.
+<return> A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -5760,23 +6239,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_scrolled_window_get_spacing">
-<description>
-Gets the spacing between the scrolled window's scrollbars and
-the scrolled widget. Used by GtkCombo
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a scrolled window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the spacing, in pixels.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_drag_dest_add_text_targets">
<description>
Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
@@ -5790,7 +6252,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -5805,7 +6267,7 @@
and to get those strings from @column in the model of @completion.
This functions creates and adds a #GtkCellRendererText for the selected
-column. If you need to set the text column, but don't want the cell
+column. If you need to set the text column, but don't want the cell
renderer, use g_object_set() to set the ::text_column property directly.
Since: 2.4
@@ -6107,7 +6569,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the side image for @page, or %NULL
-if there's no side image for the page.
+if there's no side image for the page.
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -6196,7 +6658,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> @binding_set to remove an entry of
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to remove an entry of
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keyval">
@@ -6211,21 +6673,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_add_filter">
+<function name="GtkMenuToolButton">
<description>
-Adds a filter to the global list of accel path filters.
+The ::show-menu signal is emitted before the menu is shown.
-Accel map entries whose accel path matches one of the filters
-are skipped by gtk_accel_map_foreach().
+It can be used to populate the menu on demand, using
+gtk_menu_tool_button_get_menu().
-This function is intended for GTK+ modules that create their own
-menus, but don't want them to be saved into the applications accelerator
-map dump.
+Note that even if you populate the menu dynamically in this way,
+you must set an empty menu on the #GtkMenuToolButton beforehand,
+since the arrow is made insensitive if the menu is not set.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter_pattern">
-<parameter_description> a pattern (see #GPatternSpec)
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6257,10 +6719,10 @@
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset">
<description>
-This function registers GTK+'s internal rich text serialization
+This function registers GTK+'s internal rich text serialization
format with the passed @buffer. The internal format does not comply
to any standard rich text format and only works between #GtkTextBuffer
-instances. It is capable of serializing all of a text buffer's tags
+instances. It is capable of serializing all of a text buffer's tags
and embedded pixbufs.
This function is just a wrapper around
@@ -6288,7 +6750,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
-format's mime-type.
+format's mime-type.
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -6345,7 +6807,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
<parameter_description> the factory path of @ifactory, a string of the form
-&lt;literal&gt;"&lt;name&gt;"&lt;/literal&gt;
+<literal>"<name>"</literal>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="accel_group">
@@ -6381,7 +6843,7 @@
<function name="gtk_link_button_set_visited">
<description>
-Sets the 'visited' state of the URI where the #GtkLinkButton
+Sets the 'visited' state of the URI where the #GtkLinkButton
points. See gtk_link_button_get_visited() for more details.
Since: 2.14
@@ -6393,7 +6855,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="visited">
-<parameter_description> the new 'visited' state
+<parameter_description> the new 'visited' state
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6529,7 +6991,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="short_description">
-<parameter_description> Interface for containers containing #GtkToolItem widgets.
+<parameter_description> Interface for containers containing GtkToolItem widgets.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6571,8 +7033,8 @@
Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView. @x and @y specify the
center the expander. The size of the expander is determined by the
"expander-size" style property of @widget. (If widget is not
-specified or doesn't have an "expander-size" property, an
-unspecified default size will be used, since the caller doesn't
+specified or doesn't have an "expander-size" property, an
+unspecified default size will be used, since the caller doesn't
have sufficient information to position the expander, this is
likely not useful.) The expander is expander_size pixels tall
in the collapsed position and expander_size pixels wide in the
@@ -6628,7 +7090,7 @@
Converts coordinate (@buffer_x, @buffer_y) to coordinates for the window
@win, and stores the result in (@window_x, @window_y).
-Note that you can't convert coordinates for a nonexisting window (see
+Note that you can't convert coordinates for a nonexisting window (see
gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()).
</description>
@@ -6663,7 +7125,8 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_view_unset_model_drag_dest">
<description>
-Undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_dest().
+Undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this
+method sets #GtkIconView:reorderable to %FALSE.
Since: 2.8
@@ -6698,9 +7161,9 @@
<description>
Sets the title of the #GtkWindow. The title of a window will be
displayed in its title bar; on the X Window System, the title bar
-is rendered by the &lt;link linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window
-manager&lt;/link&gt;, so exactly how the title appears to users may vary
-according to a user's exact configuration. The title should help a
+is rendered by the <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window
+manager</link>, so exactly how the title appears to users may vary
+according to a user's exact configuration. The title should help a
user distinguish this window from other windows they may have
open. A good title might include the application name and current
document filename, for example.
@@ -6814,23 +7277,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_get_image_position">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_draw_page_finish">
<description>
-Gets the position of the image relative to the text
-inside the button.
+Signalize that drawing of particular page is complete.
+
+It is called after completion of page drawing (e.g. drawing in another
+thread).
+If gtk_print_operation_set_defer_drawing() was called before, then this function
+has to be called by application. In another case it is called by the library
+itself.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the position
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_show_hidden">
@@ -6855,9 +7321,9 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_clear_cache">
<description>
This function should almost never be called. It clears the @tree_model_sort
-of any cached iterators that haven't been reffed with
+of any cached iterators that haven't been reffed with
gtk_tree_model_ref_node(). This might be useful if the child model being
-sorted is static (and doesn't change often) and there has been a lot of
+sorted is static (and doesn't change often) and there has been a lot of
unreffed access to nodes. As a side effect of this function, all unreffed
iters will be invalid.
@@ -7050,7 +7516,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="homogeneous">
@@ -7063,8 +7529,8 @@
<function name="gtk_builder_add_from_string">
<description>
-Parses a string containing a &lt;link linkend="BUILDER-UI"&gt;GtkBuilder
-UI definition&lt;/link&gt; and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
+Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
+UI definition</link> and merges it with the current contents of @builder.
</description>
@@ -7094,7 +7560,7 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_ok_button">
<description>
-Gets the 'OK' button.
+Gets the 'OK' button.
</description>
@@ -7104,7 +7570,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkWidget used in the dialog for the 'OK' button.
+<return> the #GtkWidget used in the dialog for the 'OK' button.
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -7187,7 +7653,7 @@
and #GtkTextView. See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
Note that "no window" widgets (which have the %GTK_NO_WINDOW flag set)
-draw on their parent container's window and thus may not draw any
+draw on their parent container's window and thus may not draw any
background themselves. This is the case for e.g. #GtkLabel. To modify
the background of such widgets, you have to set the base color on their
parent; if you want to set the background of a rectangular area around
@@ -7339,6 +7805,33 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_markup">
+<description>
+Sets @markup as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
+the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
+
+This function will take care of setting #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip to %TRUE
+and of the default handler for the #GtkStatusIcon::query-tooltip signal.
+
+See also the #GtkStatusIcon:tooltip-markup property and
+gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="markup">
+<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_new_with_attributes">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn with a number of default values. This is
@@ -7346,7 +7839,7 @@
gtk_tree_view_column_pack_start(), and
gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes() on the newly created #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-Here's a simple example:
+Here's a simple example:
|[
enum { TEXT_COLUMN, COLOR_COLUMN, N_COLUMNS };
...
@@ -7469,7 +7962,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> the type of the module, for instance 'modules', 'engines', immodules'
+<parameter_description> the type of the module, for instance 'modules', 'engines', immodules'
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -7520,7 +8013,7 @@
The @text parameter to @callback will contain the resulting rich
text if the request succeeded, or %NULL if it failed. The @length
-parameter will contain @text's length. This function can fail for
+parameter will contain @text's length. This function can fail for
various reasons, in particular if the clipboard was empty or if the
contents of the clipboard could not be converted into rich text form.
@@ -7650,15 +8143,15 @@
<function name="gtk_label_set_markup">
<description>
-Parses @str which is marked up with the &lt;link
-linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text markup language&lt;/link&gt;, setting the
-label's text and attribute list based on the parse results. If the @str is
+Parses @str which is marked up with the <link
+linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>, setting the
+label's text and attribute list based on the parse results. If the @str is
external data, you may need to escape it with g_markup_escape_text() or
-g_markup_printf_escaped()&lt;!-- --&gt;:
+g_markup_printf_escaped()<!-- -->:
|[
char *markup;
-markup = g_markup_printf_escaped ("&lt;span style=\"italic\"&gt;&percnt;s&lt;/span&gt;", str);
+markup = g_markup_printf_escaped ("<span style=\"italic\">%s</span>", str);
gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), markup);
g_free (markup);
]|
@@ -7670,7 +8163,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> a markup string (see &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango markup format&lt;/link&gt;)
+<parameter_description> a markup string (see <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -7685,7 +8178,7 @@
frame, or display it in other contexts.
The icon should be provided in whatever size it was naturally
-drawn; that is, don't scale the image before passing it to
+drawn; that is, don't scale the image before passing it to
GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute, when the desired
final size is known, to allow best quality.
@@ -7757,7 +8250,7 @@
function can be used to determine if a "Paste" menu item should be
insensitive or not.
-If you want to see if there's text available on the clipboard, use
+If you want to see if there's text available on the clipboard, use
gtk_clipboard_wait_is_text_available () instead.
@@ -7863,7 +8356,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
<parameter_description> a stock size. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1 means render at
-the size of the source and don't scale (if there are multiple
+the size of the source and don't scale (if there are multiple
source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -7872,7 +8365,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn't known
+<return> a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn't known
</return>
</function>
@@ -7880,7 +8373,7 @@
<description>
Sets the contents of the selection from a #GdkPixbuf
The pixbuf is converted to the form determined by
- selection_data-&gt;target.
+ selection_data->target.
</description>
@@ -8033,6 +8526,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_title">
+<description>
+Retrieves the title of the browse dialog used by @button. The returned value
+should not be modified or freed.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a pointer to the browse dialog's title.
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_lookup_by_gicon">
<description>
Looks up an icon and returns a structure containing
@@ -8062,7 +8574,7 @@
</parameters>
<return> a #GtkIconInfo structure containing
information about the icon, or %NULL if the icon
-wasn't found. Free with gtk_icon_info_free()
+wasn't found. Free with gtk_icon_info_free()
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -8193,7 +8705,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the position of the cursor. The cursor is displayed
+<parameter_description> the position of the cursor. The cursor is displayed
before the character with the given (base 0) index in the widget.
The value must be less than or equal to the number of characters
in the widget. A value of -1 indicates that the position should
@@ -8224,7 +8736,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_get_window">
<description>
-Return value: @widget's window.
+Return value: @widget's window.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8233,7 +8745,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> @widget's window.
+<return> @widget's window.
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -8269,7 +8781,7 @@
<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_orientation">
<description>
-Gets the orientation of the #GtkScaleButton's popup window.
+Gets the orientation of the #GtkScaleButton's popup window.
</description>
@@ -8279,43 +8791,46 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkScaleButton's orientation.
+<return> the #GtkScaleButton's orientation.
Since: 2.14
+
+Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_get_orientation() instead.
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_hsv_to_rgb">
<description>
-Converts a color from RGB space to HSV. Input values must be in the
-[0.0, 1.0] range; output values will be in the same range.
+Converts a color from HSV space to RGB.
+Input values must be in the [0.0, 1.0] range;
+output values will be in the same range.
Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="r">
-<parameter_description> Red.
+<parameter name="h">
+<parameter_description> Hue
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="g">
-<parameter_description> Green.
+<parameter name="s">
+<parameter_description> Saturation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="b">
-<parameter_description> Blue.
+<parameter name="v">
+<parameter_description> Value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="h">
-<parameter_description> Return value for the hue component.
+<parameter name="r">
+<parameter_description> Return value for the red component
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="s">
-<parameter_description> Return value for the saturation component.
+<parameter name="g">
+<parameter_description> Return value for the green component
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="v">
-<parameter_description> Return value for the value component.
+<parameter name="b">
+<parameter_description> Return value for the blue component
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -8345,7 +8860,7 @@
This function serializes the portion of text between @start
and @end in the rich text format represented by @format.
- format&lt;!-- --&gt;s to be used must be registered using
+ format<!-- -->s to be used must be registered using
gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format() or
gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() beforehand.
@@ -8423,8 +8938,21 @@
<function name="GtkStatusIcon">
<description>
-Gets emitted when the size available for the image
-changes, e.g. because the notification area got resized.
+Emitted when the #GtkSettings:gtk-tooltip-timeout has expired with the
+cursor hovering above @status_icon; or emitted when @status_icon got
+focus in keyboard mode.
+
+Using the given coordinates, the signal handler should determine
+whether a tooltip should be shown for @status_icon. If this is
+the case %TRUE should be returned, %FALSE otherwise. Note that if
+ keyboard_mode is %TRUE, the values of @x and @y are undefined and
+should not be used.
+
+The signal handler is free to manipulate @tooltip with the therefore
+destined function calls.
+
+Whether this signal is emitted is platform-dependent.
+For plain text tooltips, use #GtkStatusIcon:tooltip-text in preference.
</description>
@@ -8433,15 +8961,28 @@
<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> the new size
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate of the cursor position where the request has been
+emitted, relative to @status_icon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate of the cursor position where the request has been
+emitted, relative to @status_icon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyboard_mode">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the tooltip was trigged using the keyboard
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the icon was updated for the new
-size. Otherwise, GTK+ will scale the icon as necessary.
+<return> %TRUE if @tooltip should be shown right now, %FALSE otherwise.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -8501,7 +9042,7 @@
<function name="GtkMenuBar">
<description>
-The pack direction of the menubar. It determines how
+The child pack direction of the menubar. It determines how
the widgets contained in child menuitems are arranged.
Since: 2.8
@@ -8598,8 +9139,8 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #gint representing the font size selected, or -1
-if not.
+<return> A n integer representing the selected font size,
+or -1 if no font size is selected.
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -8660,7 +9201,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_get_parent_window">
<description>
-Gets @widget's parent window.
+Gets @widget's parent window.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8676,7 +9217,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_drag_source_row_draggable">
<description>
Asks the #GtkTreeDragSource whether a particular row can be used as
-the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn't implement
+the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn't implement
this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
@@ -8697,7 +9238,7 @@
<function name="gtk_window_move">
<description>
-Asks the &lt;link linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt; to move
+Asks the <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> to move
@window to the given position. Window managers are free to ignore
this; most window managers ignore requests for initial window
positions (instead using a user-defined placement algorithm) and
@@ -8722,13 +9263,13 @@
the bottom-right corner of the window border will be placed at that
reference point. So, to place a window in the bottom right corner
you would first set gravity to south east, then write:
-&lt;literal&gt;gtk_window_move (window, gdk_screen_width () - window_width,
-gdk_screen_height () - window_height)&lt;/literal&gt; (note that this
+<literal>gtk_window_move (window, gdk_screen_width () - window_width,
+gdk_screen_height () - window_height)</literal> (note that this
example does not take multi-head scenarios into account).
-The Extended Window Manager Hints specification at &lt;ulink
-url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec"&gt;
-http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec&lt;/ulink&gt; has a
+The Extended Window Manager Hints specification at <ulink
+url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec">
+http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec</ulink> has a
nice table of gravities in the "implementation notes" section.
The gtk_window_get_position() documentation may also be relevant.
@@ -8751,23 +9292,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_inner_border">
+<function name="GtkActivatable">
<description>
-This function returns the entry's #GtkEntry:inner-border property. See
-gtk_entry_set_inner_border() for more information.
+Whether this activatable should reset its layout
+and appearance when setting the related action or when
+the action changes appearance.
+
+See the #GtkAction documentation directly to find which properties
+should be ignored by the #GtkActivatable when this property is %FALSE.
+<note><para>#GtkActivatable implementors need to handle this property
+and call gtk_activatable_reset() on the activatable widget when it changes.</para></note>
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the entry's #GtkBorder, or %NULL if none was set.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_child_anchor">
@@ -8798,6 +9340,9 @@
Since: 2.4
+Deprecated 2.16: activatables are now responsible for activating the
+action directly so this doesnt apply anymore.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="action">
@@ -8854,7 +9399,7 @@
<function name="gtk_expander_get_use_markup">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
+Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -8863,7 +9408,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
+<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup
Since: 2.4
</return>
@@ -8872,7 +9417,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_hover_expand">
<description>
Enables of disables the hover expansion mode of @tree_view.
-Hover expansion makes rows expand or collaps if the pointer
+Hover expansion makes rows expand or collapse if the pointer
moves over them.
Since: 2.6
@@ -9004,6 +9549,8 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the orientation
+
+Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_get_orientation() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -9037,7 +9584,7 @@
Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
-they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
@@ -9125,7 +9672,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the selector has a palette. %FALSE if it hasn't.
+<return> %TRUE if the selector has a palette. %FALSE if it hasn't.
</return>
</function>
@@ -9165,7 +9712,7 @@
<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_path">
<description>
Obtains the path in which to look for IM modules. See the documentation
-of the &lt;link linkend="im-module-path"&gt;&lt;envar&gt;GTK_PATH&lt;/envar&gt;&lt;/link&gt;
+of the <link linkend="im-module-path"><envar>GTK_PATH</envar></link>
environment variable for more details about looking up modules. This
function is useful solely for utilities supplied with GTK+ and should
not be used by applications under normal circumstances.
@@ -9222,9 +9769,9 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_iter_is_valid">
<description>
-&lt;warning&gt;&lt;para&gt;
+<warning><para>
This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing purposes.
-&lt;/para&gt;&lt;/warning&gt;
+</para></warning>
Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeModelSort.
@@ -9305,7 +9852,7 @@
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_not_found">
<description>
Sets whether @chooser should display the recently used resources that
-it didn't find. This only applies to local resources.
+it didn't find. This only applies to local resources.
Since: 2.10
@@ -9316,7 +9863,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="show_not_found">
-<parameter_description> whether to show the local items we didn't find
+<parameter_description> whether to show the local items we didn't find
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -9398,7 +9945,7 @@
<function name="gtk_statusbar_remove">
<description>
-Forces the removal of a message from a statusbar's stack.
+Forces the removal of a message from a statusbar's stack.
The exact @context_id and @message_id must be specified.
</description>
@@ -9434,7 +9981,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> text to be used as tooltip text for button's arrow button
+<parameter_description> text to be used as tooltip text for button's arrow button
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -9489,7 +10036,7 @@
is clicked.
Note that as the user scrolls around in the entry the offsets will
-change; you'll need to connect to the "notify::scroll-offset"
+change; you'll need to connect to the "notify::scroll-offset"
signal to track this. Remember when using the #PangoLayout
functions you need to convert to and from pixels using
PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
@@ -9521,7 +10068,7 @@
<description>
Sets the sensitivity of a widget. A widget is sensitive if the user
can interact with it. Insensitive widgets are "grayed out" and the
-user can't interact with them. Insensitive widgets are known as
+user can't interact with them. Insensitive widgets are known as
"inactive", "disabled", or "ghosted" in some other toolkits.
</description>
@@ -9635,7 +10182,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description> markup text to be used as tooltip text for button's arrow button
+<parameter_description> markup text to be used as tooltip text for button's arrow button
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -9791,7 +10338,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="track_motion">
@@ -9806,9 +10353,9 @@
<description>
Prevents gtk_init(), gtk_init_check(), gtk_init_with_args() and
gtk_parse_args() from automatically
-calling &lt;literal&gt;setlocale (LC_ALL, "")&lt;/literal&gt;. You would
+calling <literal>setlocale (LC_ALL, "")</literal>. You would
want to use this function if you wanted to set the locale for
-your program to something other than the user's locale, or if
+your program to something other than the user's locale, or if
you wanted to set different values for different locale categories.
Most programs should not need to call this function.
@@ -9819,32 +10366,54 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_skip_taskbar_hint">
+<function name="gtk_action_set_short_label">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_skip_taskbar_hint()
+Sets a shorter label text on @action.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="short_label">
+<parameter_description> the label text to set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if window shouldn't be in taskbar
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_reorderable">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_skip_taskbar_hint">
+<description>
+Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_skip_taskbar_hint()
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if window shouldn't be in taskbar
+
+Since: 2.2
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_reorderable">
<description>
This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder models that
support the #GtkTreeDragSourceIface and the #GtkTreeDragDestIface. Both
#GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then
the user can reorder the model by dragging and dropping rows. The
-developer can listen to these changes by connecting to the model's
-row_inserted and row_deleted signals.
+developer can listen to these changes by connecting to the model's
+row_inserted and row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
+the icon view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
+drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably
@@ -9941,11 +10510,11 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> the type of the module, for instance 'modules', 'engines', immodules'
+<parameter_description> the type of the module, for instance 'modules', 'engines', immodules'
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the pathname to the found module, or %NULL if it wasn't found.
+<return> the pathname to the found module, or %NULL if it wasn't found.
Free with g_free().
</return>
</function>
@@ -10204,12 +10773,12 @@
<function name="gtk_window_unfullscreen">
<description>
Asks to toggle off the fullscreen state for @window. Note that you
-shouldn't assume the window is definitely not full screen
-afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;) could fullscreen it
+shouldn't assume the window is definitely not full screen
+afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could fullscreen it
again, and not all window managers honor requests to unfullscreen
windows. But normally the window will end up restored to its normal
-state. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
+state. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal
on #GtkWidget.
@@ -10229,8 +10798,8 @@
<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_index">
<description>
Same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a
-&lt;emphasis&gt;byte&lt;/emphasis&gt; index. The given byte index must be at
-the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8
+<emphasis>byte</emphasis> index. The given byte index must be at
+the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8
encoded character.
@@ -10241,7 +10810,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="byte_on_line">
-<parameter_description> a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
+<parameter_description> a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10253,7 +10822,7 @@
Moves @count visible lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
-onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
+onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
@@ -10347,7 +10916,7 @@
<description>
Changes the size request of the entry to be about the right size
for @n_chars characters. Note that it changes the size
-&lt;emphasis&gt;request&lt;/emphasis&gt;, the size can still be affected by
+<emphasis>request</emphasis>, the size can still be affected by
how you pack the widget into containers. If @n_chars is -1, the
size reverts to the default entry size.
@@ -10370,8 +10939,8 @@
Adds a button with the given text (or a stock button, if @button_text is a
stock ID) and sets things up so that clicking the button will emit the
#GtkDialog::response signal with the given @response_id. The button is
-appended to the end of the dialog's action area. The button widget is
-returned, but usually you don't need it.
+appended to the end of the dialog's action area. The button widget is
+returned, but usually you don't need it.
</description>
@@ -10398,7 +10967,7 @@
Resizes the window as if the user had done so, obeying geometry
constraints. The default geometry constraint is that windows may
not be smaller than their size request; to override this
-constraint, call gtk_widget_set_size_request() to set the window's
+constraint, call gtk_widget_set_size_request() to set the window's
request to a smaller value.
If gtk_window_resize() is called before showing a window for the
@@ -10450,6 +11019,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_set_label">
+<description>
+Sets the label of @action.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the label text to set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_unselect_path">
<description>
Unselects the row at @path.
@@ -10574,7 +11163,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10584,6 +11173,28 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scrollbar_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new scrollbar with the given orientation.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the scrollbar's orientation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GtkScrollbar.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_add_filter">
<description>
Adds @filter to the list of #GtkRecentFilter objects held by @chooser.
@@ -10616,7 +11227,7 @@
a carriage return/newline sequence. For some Unicode characters,
the equivalent of say the letter "a" with an accent mark will be
represented as two characters, first the letter then a "combining
-mark" that causes the accent to be rendered; so the cursor can't go
+mark" that causes the accent to be rendered; so the cursor can't go
between those two characters. See also the #PangoLogAttr structure and
pango_break() function.
@@ -10679,7 +11290,7 @@
timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
This function is a little faster than calling
-gtk_clipboard_wait_for_uris() since it doesn't need to retrieve
+gtk_clipboard_wait_for_uris() since it doesn't need to retrieve
the actual URI data.
@@ -10799,6 +11410,22 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source">
+<description>
+Returns: index of the icon which is the source of the current
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> index of the icon which is the source of the current
+DND operation, or -1.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_stock_set_translate_func">
<description>
Sets a function to be used for translating the @label of
@@ -10807,8 +11434,36 @@
If no function is registered for a translation domain,
g_dgettext() is used.
-Since: 2.8
+The function is used for all stock items whose
+ translation_domain matches @domain. Note that it is possible
+to use strings different from the actual gettext translation domain
+of your application for this, as long as your #GtkTranslateFunc uses
+the correct domain when calling dgettext(). This can be useful, e.g.
+when dealing with message contexts:
+
+|[
+GtkStockItem items[] = {
+{ MY_ITEM1, NC_("odd items", "Item 1"), 0, 0, "odd-item-domain" },
+{ MY_ITEM2, NC_("even items", "Item 2"), 0, 0, "even-item-domain" },
+};
+
+gchar *
+my_translate_func (const gchar *msgid,
+gpointer data)
+{
+gchar *msgctxt = data;
+
+return (gchar*)g_dpgettext2 (GETTEXT_PACKAGE, msgctxt, msgid);
+}
+
+/* ... &ast/
+
+gtk_stock_add (items, G_N_ELEMENTS (items));
+gtk_stock_set_translate_func ("odd-item-domain", my_translate_func, "odd items");
+gtk_stock_set_translate_func ("even-item-domain", my_translate_func, "even items");
+]|
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -11056,7 +11711,7 @@
<function name="gtk_menu_shell_select_first">
<description>
Select the first visible or selectable child of the menu shell;
-don't select tearoff items unless the only item is a tearoff
+don't select tearoff items unless the only item is a tearoff
item.
Since: 2.2
@@ -11070,7 +11725,7 @@
<parameter name="search_sensitive">
<parameter_description> if %TRUE, search for the first selectable
menu item, otherwise select nothing if
-the first item isn't sensitive. This
+the first item isn't sensitive. This
should be %FALSE if the menu is being
popped up initially.
</parameter_description>
@@ -11245,6 +11900,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_activatable">
+<description>
+Returns: %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_n_pages">
<description>
Return value: The number of pages in the @assistant.
@@ -11400,10 +12076,12 @@
<function name="gtk_action_disconnect_proxy">
<description>
Disconnects a proxy widget from an action.
-Does &lt;emphasis&gt;not&lt;/emphasis&gt; destroy the widget, however.
+Does <emphasis>not</emphasis> destroy the widget, however.
Since: 2.4
+Deprecated 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_set_related_action() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="action">
@@ -11505,7 +12183,7 @@
the values given to this function.
Calling
-&lt;literal&gt;gtk_tree_store_insert_with_values (tree_store, iter, position, ...)&lt;/literal&gt;
+<literal>gtk_tree_store_insert_with_values (tree_store, iter, position, ...)</literal>
has the same effect as calling
|[
gtk_tree_store_insert (tree_store, iter, position);
@@ -11682,7 +12360,7 @@
with other windows in the same application. To keep modal dialogs
on top of main application windows, use
gtk_window_set_transient_for() to make the dialog transient for the
-parent; most &lt;link linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window managers&lt;/link&gt;
+parent; most <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window managers</link>
will then disallow lowering the dialog below the parent.
@@ -11766,14 +12444,14 @@
<function name="gtk_binding_entry_add_signal">
<description>
Override or install a new key binding for @keyval with @modifiers on
- binding_set When the binding is activated, @signal_name will be
+ binding_set When the binding is activated, @signal_name will be
emitted on the target widget, with @n_args @Varargs used as
arguments.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> @binding_set to install an entry for
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to install an entry for
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keyval">
@@ -11803,7 +12481,7 @@
<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_show_arrow">
<description>
Sets whether to show an overflow menu when
- toolbar doesn't have room for all items on it. If %TRUE,
+ toolbar doesn't have room for all items on it. If %TRUE,
items that there are not room are available through an
overflow menu.
@@ -11827,7 +12505,7 @@
<description>
Creates a new expander using @label as the text of the label.
If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
-If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
+If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
accelerator called a mnemonic.
Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
@@ -11887,10 +12565,10 @@
<function name="gtk_accelerator_parse">
<description>
Parses a string representing an accelerator. The
-format looks like "&lt;Control&gt;a" or "&lt;Shift&gt;&lt;Alt&gt;F1" or
-"&lt;Release&gt;z" (the last one is for key release).
+format looks like "<Control>a" or "<Shift><Alt>F1" or
+"<Release>z" (the last one is for key release).
The parser is fairly liberal and allows lower or upper case,
-and also abbreviations such as "&lt;Ctl&gt;" and "&lt;Ctrl&gt;".
+and also abbreviations such as "<Ctl>" and "<Ctrl>".
If the parse fails, @accelerator_key and @accelerator_mods will
be set to 0 (zero).
@@ -11915,7 +12593,7 @@
<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_adjustment">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkAdjustment associated with the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
+Gets the #GtkAdjustment associated with the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
See gtk_range_get_adjustment() for details.
@@ -12003,7 +12681,7 @@
<description>
Invokes @callback on each child of @container, including children
that are considered "internal" (implementation details of the
-container). "Internal" children generally weren't added by the user
+container). "Internal" children generally weren't added by the user
of the container, but were added by the container implementation
itself. Most applications should use gtk_container_foreach(),
rather than gtk_container_forall().
@@ -12142,6 +12820,30 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_set_always_show_image">
+<description>
+If %TRUE, the menu item will ignore the #GtkSettings:gtk-menu-images
+setting and always show the image, if available.
+
+Use this property if the menuitem would be useless or hard to use
+without the image.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image_menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImageMenuItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="always_show">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the menuitem should always show the image
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_binding_set_find">
<description>
Find a binding set by its globally unique name. The @set_name can
@@ -12162,7 +12864,7 @@
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_width_chars">
<description>
-Retrieves the width in characters of the @button widget's entry and/or label.
+Retrieves the width in characters of the @button widget's entry and/or label.
</description>
@@ -12350,7 +13052,7 @@
<description>
Sets whether the button will grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
-you don't want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
+you don't want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
application.
Since: 2.4
@@ -12369,6 +13071,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_get_tooltip">
+<description>
+Gets the tooltip text of @action.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the tooltip text
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_complete">
<description>
Gets whether @page is complete..
@@ -12397,7 +13117,7 @@
See gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri().
Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
-(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents"), which is &lt;emphasis&gt;not the same&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents"), which is <emphasis>not the same</emphasis>
as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
#GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_SELECT_FOLDER mode
(e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents/selected-folder/". To get the
@@ -12453,7 +13173,8 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_source">
<description>
-Turns @icon_view into a drag source for automatic DND.
+Turns @icon_view into a drag source for automatic DND. Calling this
+method sets #GtkIconView:reorderable to %FALSE.
Since: 2.8
@@ -12640,6 +13361,8 @@
Since: 2.4
+Deprecated 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_set_related_action() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="action">
@@ -12728,7 +13451,7 @@
<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_increments">
<description>
Sets the step and page increments for spin_button. This affects how
-quickly the value changes when the spin button's arrows are activated.
+quickly the value changes when the spin button's arrows are activated.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -12834,7 +13557,7 @@
<function name="gtk_window_get_has_frame">
<description>
Accessor for whether the window has a frame window exterior to
- window-&gt;window. Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_has_frame ().
+ window->window. Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_has_frame ().
</description>
@@ -12868,7 +13591,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="len">
<parameter_description> length of @text, in bytes, or -1, in which case
-the length will be determined with &lt;function&gt;strlen()&lt;/function&gt;.
+the length will be determined with <function>strlen()</function>.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -12878,14 +13601,14 @@
<function name="gtk_window_maximize">
<description>
Asks to maximize @window, so that it becomes full-screen. Note that
-you shouldn't assume the window is definitely maximized afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;) could unmaximize it
+you shouldn't assume the window is definitely maximized afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unmaximize it
again, and not all window managers support maximization. But
-normally the window will end up maximized. Just don't write code
+normally the window will end up maximized. Just don't write code
that crashes if not.
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
in which case the window will be maximized when it appears onscreen
initially.
@@ -12990,7 +13713,7 @@
<function name="gtk_printer_list_papers">
<description>
Lists all the paper sizes @printer supports.
-This will return and empty list unless the printer's details are
+This will return and empty list unless the printer's details are
available, see gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
@@ -13012,7 +13735,7 @@
Sets the name of the print job. The name is used to identify
the job (e.g. in monitoring applications like eggcups).
-If you don't set a job name, GTK+ picks a default one by
+If you don't set a job name, GTK+ picks a default one by
numbering successive print jobs.
Since: 2.10
@@ -13076,7 +13799,7 @@
<description>
This function will generate a @button click in the upwards or downwards
spin button arrow areas, usually leading to an increase or decrease of
-spin button's value.
+spin button's value.
</description>
@@ -13184,7 +13907,7 @@
widget. In GTK+ 2.0, the draw method is gone, and instead
gtk_widget_draw() simply invalidates the specified region of the
widget, then updates the invalid region of the widget immediately.
-Usually you don't want to update the region immediately for
+Usually you don't want to update the region immediately for
performance reasons, so in general gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() is
a better choice if you want to draw a region of a widget.
@@ -13211,7 +13934,7 @@
"in between" display. Normally you would turn off the inconsistent
state again if the user toggles the toggle button. This has to be
done manually, gtk_toggle_button_set_inconsistent() only affects
-visual appearance, it doesn't affect the semantics of the button.
+visual appearance, it doesn't affect the semantics of the button.
</description>
@@ -13271,12 +13994,34 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="_gtk_windwo_set_is_toplevel">
+<description>
+Internal function used by #GtkPlug when it gets parented/unparented by a
+#GtkSocket. This keeps the @window's #GTK_TOPLEVEL flag in sync with the
+global list of toplevel windows.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_toplevel">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the window is still a real toplevel (nominally a
+parent of the root window); %FALSE if it is not (for example, for an
+in-process, parented GtkPlug)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_view_new_with_markup">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererText
to it, and makes its show @markup. The text can text can be
-marked up with the &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text
-markup language&lt;/link&gt;.
+marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text
+markup language</link>.
</description>
@@ -13469,7 +14214,7 @@
<description>
This function will search @widget and all its descendants for a GtkLabel
widget with a text string matching @label_pattern.
-The @label_pattern may contain asterisks '*' and question marks '?' as
+The @label_pattern may contain asterisks '*' and question marks '?' as
placeholders, g_pattern_match() is used for the matching.
Note that locales other than "C" tend to alter (translate" label strings,
so this function is genrally only useful in test programs with
@@ -13497,7 +14242,7 @@
<description>
Sets the default number of pixels of blank space
to put below paragraphs in @text_view. May be overridden
-by tags applied to @text_view's buffer.
+by tags applied to @text_view's buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -13534,7 +14279,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_set_size_request">
<description>
-Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size
+Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size
request will be @width by @height. You can use this function to
force a widget to be either larger or smaller than it normally
would be.
@@ -13548,7 +14293,7 @@
Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes,
translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action
-can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
+can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be
correct.
@@ -13561,7 +14306,7 @@
If the size request in a given direction is -1 (unset), then
the "natural" size request of the widget will be used instead.
-Widgets can't actually be allocated a size less than 1 by 1, but
+Widgets can't actually be allocated a size less than 1 by 1, but
you can pass 0,0 to this function to mean "as small as possible."
</description>
@@ -13651,6 +14396,31 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_name">
+<description>
+Retrieves the icon name used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
+no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
+pixbuf, stock or gicon).
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> An icon name, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
+wasn't set from an icon name
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_resizable">
<description>
If @resizable is %TRUE, then the user can explicitly resize the column by
@@ -13674,7 +14444,7 @@
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_pulse">
<description>
-Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
+Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
Causes the progress bar to enter "activity mode," where a block
bounces back and forth. Each call to gtk_progress_bar_pulse()
causes the block to move by a little bit (the amount of movement
@@ -13771,7 +14541,7 @@
Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
identified by @signal_id can currently be activated.
This is done by emitting the #GtkWidget::can-activate-accel
-signal on @widget; if the signal isn't overridden by a
+signal on @widget; if the signal isn't overridden by a
handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
its ancestors mapped.
@@ -13801,7 +14571,7 @@
on @editable, e.g. adding a #GtkEntryCompletion or setting
up additional columns in a #GtkComboBox.
-Note that GTK+ doesn't guarantee that cell renderers will
+Note that GTK+ doesn't guarantee that cell renderers will
continue to use the same kind of widget for editing in future
releases, therefore you should check the type of @editable
before doing any specific setup, as in the following example:
@@ -13816,7 +14586,7 @@
{
GtkEntry *entry = GTK_ENTRY (editable);
-/&ast; ... create a GtkEntryCompletion &ast;/
+/* ... create a GtkEntryCompletion */
gtk_entry_set_completion (entry, completion);
}
@@ -13856,7 +14626,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -13865,10 +14635,12 @@
<function name="gtk_scale_button_set_orientation">
<description>
-Sets the orientation of the #GtkScaleButton's popup window.
+Sets the orientation of the #GtkScaleButton's popup window.
Since: 2.14
+Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_set_orientation() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="button">
@@ -13915,6 +14687,8 @@
%NULL, if it is not attached to an action.
Since: 2.10
+
+Deprecated 2.16: Use gtk_activatable_get_related_action() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -14013,7 +14787,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -14049,11 +14823,11 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the element's label.
+<parameter_description> the element's label.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
+<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
@@ -14061,7 +14835,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that provides pictorial representation of the element's function.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that provides pictorial representation of the element's function.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="callback">
@@ -14098,21 +14872,21 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_column">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCheckMenuItem containing a label. The label
-will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
-in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
+Return value: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkCheckMenuItem
+<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+used, or -1 if this is disabled.
+
+Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
@@ -14288,14 +15062,14 @@
<description>
For widgets that can be "activated" (buttons, menu items, etc.)
this function activates them. Activation is what happens when you
-press Enter on a widget during key navigation. If @widget isn't
+press Enter on a widget during key navigation. If @widget isn't
activatable, the function returns %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's activatable
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's activatable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -14308,7 +15082,7 @@
Retrieves the current focused widget within the window.
Note that this is the widget that would have the focus
if the toplevel window focused; if the toplevel window
-is not focused then &lt;literal&gt;GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS (widget)&lt;/literal&gt; will
+is not focused then <literal>GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS (widget)</literal> will
not be %TRUE for the widget.
@@ -14347,7 +15121,7 @@
<parameter name="new_order">
<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the current position of each child
to its old position before the re-ordering,
-i.e. @new_order&lt;literal&gt;[newpos] = oldpos&lt;/literal&gt;.
+i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -14359,7 +15133,7 @@
Moves @count lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
-onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
+onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
@@ -14437,7 +15211,7 @@
<function name="gtk_window_get_icon">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_icon() (or if you've
+Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_icon() (or if you've
called gtk_window_set_icon_list(), gets the first icon in
the icon list).
@@ -14457,7 +15231,7 @@
<description>
Sets the default number of pixels of blank space to leave between
display/wrapped lines within a paragraph. May be overridden by
-tags in @text_view's buffer.
+tags in @text_view's buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -14516,6 +15290,44 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_new_with_range">
+<description>
+Creates a new scale widget with the given orientation that lets the
+user input a number between @min and @max (including @min and @max)
+with the increment @step. @step must be nonzero; it's the distance
+the slider moves when using the arrow keys to adjust the scale
+value.
+
+Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if @step
+is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
+needs, use gtk_scale_set_digits() to correct it.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the scale's orientation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="min">
+<parameter_description> minimum value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max">
+<parameter_description> maximum value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> step increment (tick size) used with keyboard shortcuts
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkScale
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_display">
<description>
Retrieves the display of the selection.
@@ -14689,7 +15501,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_destroyed">
<description>
This function sets * widget_pointer to %NULL if @widget_pointer !=
-%NULL. It's intended to be used as a callback connected to the
+%NULL. It's intended to be used as a callback connected to the
"destroy" signal of a widget. You connect gtk_widget_destroyed()
as a signal handler, and pass the address of your widget variable
as user data. Then when the widget is destroyed, the variable will
@@ -14715,13 +15527,13 @@
This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
In combination with the window title, the window role allows a
-&lt;link linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt; to identify "the
+<link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> to identify "the
same" window when an application is restarted. So for example you
-might set the "toolbox" role on your app's toolbox window, so that
+might set the "toolbox" role on your app's toolbox window, so that
when the user restarts their session, the window manager can put
the toolbox back in the same place.
-If a window already has a unique title, you don't need to set the
+If a window already has a unique title, you don't need to set the
role, since the WM can use the title to identify the window when
restoring the session.
@@ -14782,6 +15594,35 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_from_gicon">
+<description>
+Sets the icon shown in the entry at the specified position
+from the current icon theme.
+If the icon isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be displayed
+instead.
+
+If @icon is %NULL, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> The position at which to set the icon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> The icon to set, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_set_accel_path">
<description>
Sets an accelerator path for this menu from which accelerator paths
@@ -14793,9 +15634,9 @@
each menu item of this menu, that contains a label describing its purpose,
automatically gets an accel path assigned. For example, a menu containing
menu items "New" and "Exit", will, after
-&lt;literal&gt;gtk_menu_set_accel_path (menu, "&lt;Gnumeric-Sheet&gt;/File");&lt;/literal&gt;
+<literal>gtk_menu_set_accel_path (menu, "<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File");</literal>
has been called, assign its items the accel paths:
-&lt;literal&gt;"&lt;Gnumeric-Sheet&gt;/File/New"&lt;/literal&gt; and &lt;literal&gt;"&lt;Gnumeric-Sheet&gt;/File/Exit"&lt;/literal&gt;.
+<literal>"<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File/New"</literal> and <literal>"<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File/Exit"</literal>.
Assigning accel paths to menu items then enables the user to change
their accelerators at runtime. More details about accelerator paths
and their default setups can be found at gtk_accel_map_add_entry().
@@ -14829,7 +15670,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> @binding_set to skip an entry of
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to skip an entry of
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keyval">
@@ -14870,7 +15711,7 @@
@base_widget will be returned.
The general purpose of this function is to find the most likely "action"
widget, relative to another labeling widget. Such as finding a
-button or text entry widget, given it's corresponding label widget.
+button or text entry widget, given it's corresponding label widget.
</description>
@@ -15139,6 +15980,24 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_pulse_step">
+<description>
+Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_get_proxies">
<description>
Return value: a #GSList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
@@ -15189,7 +16048,7 @@
timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
This function is a little faster than calling
-gtk_clipboard_wait_for_image() since it doesn't need to retrieve
+gtk_clipboard_wait_for_image() since it doesn't need to retrieve
the actual image data.
@@ -15231,7 +16090,7 @@
<function name="gtk_menu_item_remove_submenu">
<description>
-Removes the widget's submenu.
+Removes the widget's submenu.
Deprecated: 2.12: gtk_menu_item_remove_submenu() is deprecated and
should not be used in newly written code. Use
@@ -15247,6 +16106,33 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_text">
+<description>
+Sets @text as the contents of the tooltip.
+
+This function will take care of setting #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip to
+%TRUE and of the default handler for the #GtkStatusIcon::query-tooltip
+signal.
+
+See also the #GtkStatusIcon:tooltip-text property and
+gtk_tooltip_set_text().
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_valid">
<description>
Return value: %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path.
@@ -15291,7 +16177,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> a #GtkIconInfo structure containing information
-about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn't found. Free with
+about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn't found. Free with
gtk_icon_info_free()
Since: 2.4
@@ -15303,7 +16189,7 @@
This signal is emitted when the children of a node in the #GtkTreeModel
have been reordered.
-Note that this signal is &lt;emphasis&gt;not&lt;/emphasis&gt; emitted
+Note that this signal is <emphasis>not</emphasis> emitted
when rows are reordered by DND, since this is implemented
by removing and then reinserting the row.
@@ -15366,7 +16252,7 @@
<description>
Sets whether a number should be added to the items of @menu. The
numbers are shown to provide a unique character for a mnemonic to
-be used inside ten menu item's label. Only the first the items
+be used inside ten menu item's label. Only the first the items
get a number to avoid clashes.
Since: 2.10
@@ -15410,7 +16296,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="points">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint&lt;!-- --&gt;s
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint<!-- -->s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="npoints">
@@ -15455,7 +16341,7 @@
<function name="gtk_item_factory_from_path">
<description>
Finds an item factory which has been constructed using the
-&lt;literal&gt;"&lt;name&gt;"&lt;/literal&gt; prefix of @path as the @path argument
+<literal>"<name>"</literal> prefix of @path as the @path argument
for gtk_item_factory_new().
Deprecated: 2.4: Use #GtkUIManager instead.
@@ -15464,7 +16350,7 @@
<parameters>
<parameter name="path">
<parameter_description> a string starting with a factory path of the form
-&lt;literal&gt;"&lt;name&gt;"&lt;/literal&gt;
+<literal>"<name>"</literal>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -15474,7 +16360,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_string_from_iter">
<description>
-Generates a string representation of the iter. This string is a ':'
+Generates a string representation of the iter. This string is a ':'
separated list of numbers. For example, "4:10:0:3" would be an
acceptable return value for this string.
@@ -15498,7 +16384,7 @@
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_remove_shortcut_folder">
<description>
-Removes a folder from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
+Removes a folder from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
</description>
@@ -15580,7 +16466,7 @@
by gtk_widget_create_pango_context(), this context is owned by
the widget (it can be used until the screen for the widget changes
or the widget is removed from its toplevel), and will be updated to
-match any changes to the widget's attributes.
+match any changes to the widget's attributes.
If you create and keep a #PangoLayout using this context, you must
deal with changes to the context by calling pango_layout_context_changed()
@@ -15799,12 +16685,11 @@
<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_get_current_folder">
<description>
Gets the current folder for the #GtkFileChooserEntry. If the
-user has only entered a filename, this will be the base folder
+user has only entered a filename, this will be in the base folder
(see _gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_base_folder()), but if the
user has entered a relative or absolute path, then it will
-be different. If the user has entered a relative or absolute
-path that doesn't point to a folder in the file system, it will
-be %NULL.
+be different. If the user has entered unparsable text, or text which
+the entry cannot handle, this will return %NULL.
</description>
@@ -15844,7 +16729,7 @@
This function should be called from a #GtkMenuPositionFunc if the
menu should not appear on the same monitor as the pointer. This
-information can't be reliably inferred from the coordinates returned
+information can't be reliably inferred from the coordinates returned
by a #GtkMenuPositionFunc, since, for very long menus, these coordinates
may extend beyond the monitor boundaries or even the screen boundaries.
@@ -15955,7 +16840,7 @@
focus.
The @take_focus state of a menu or menu bar is automatically propagated
-to submenus whenever a submenu is popped up, so you don't have to worry
+to submenus whenever a submenu is popped up, so you don't have to worry
about recursively setting it for your entire menu hierarchy. Only when
programmatically picking a submenu and popping it up manually, the
@take_focus property of the submenu needs to be set explicitely.
@@ -15963,7 +16848,7 @@
Note that setting it to %FALSE has side-effects:
If the focus is in some other app, it keeps the focus and keynav in
-the menu doesn't work. Consequently, keynav on the menu will only
+the menu doesn't work. Consequently, keynav on the menu will only
work if the focus is on some toplevel owned by the onscreen keyboard.
To avoid confusing the user, menus with @take_focus set to %FALSE
@@ -16036,7 +16921,7 @@
Creates up a #GtkStyle from styles defined in a RC file by providing
the raw components used in matching. This function may be useful
when creating pseudo-widgets that should be themed like widgets but
-don't actually have corresponding GTK+ widgets. An example of this
+don't actually have corresponding GTK+ widgets. An example of this
would be items inside a GNOME canvas widget.
The action of gtk_rc_get_style() is similar to:
@@ -16132,6 +17017,30 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_binding_entry_add">
+<description>
+Adds a binding entry.
+
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_binding_entry_add_signal() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="binding_set">
+<parameter_description> #a GtkBindingSet to clear an entry of
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> key value of binding to clear
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to clear
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_search_path">
<description>
Gets the current search path. See gtk_icon_theme_set_search_path().
@@ -16162,7 +17071,7 @@
<description>
Creates a new message dialog, which is a simple dialog with an icon
indicating the dialog type (error, warning, etc.) and some text which
-is marked up with the &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text markup language&lt;/link&gt;.
+is marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
When the user clicks a button a "response" signal is emitted with
response IDs from #GtkResponseType. See #GtkDialog for more details.
@@ -16172,8 +17081,8 @@
Usually this is what you want, but if you have an existing
Pango markup string that you want to use literally as the
label, then you need to use gtk_message_dialog_set_markup()
-instead, since you can't pass the markup string either
-as the format (it might contain '%' characters) or as a string
+instead, since you can't pass the markup string either
+as the format (it might contain '%' characters) or as a string
argument.
|[
GtkWidget *dialog;
@@ -16297,7 +17206,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> adjustment-&gt;value for an adjustment belonging to @widget.
+<return> adjustment->value for an adjustment belonging to @widget.
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -16326,7 +17235,7 @@
The "activate" signals of the actions are connected to the callbacks and
their accel paths are set to
-&lt;literal&gt;&lt;Actions&gt;/&lt;replaceable&gt;group-name&lt;/replaceable&gt;/&lt;replaceable&gt;action-name&lt;/replaceable&gt;&lt;/literal&gt;.
+<literal><Actions>/<replaceable>group-name</replaceable>/<replaceable>action-name</replaceable></literal>.
Since: 2.4
@@ -16355,7 +17264,7 @@
<function name="gtk_accel_map_foreach">
<description>
Loops over the entries in the accelerator map whose accel path
-doesn't match any of the filters added with gtk_accel_map_add_filter(),
+doesn't match any of the filters added with gtk_accel_map_add_filter(),
and execute @foreach_func on each. The signature of @foreach_func is
that of #GtkAccelMapForeach, the @changed parameter indicates whether
this accelerator was changed during runtime (thus, would need
@@ -16380,7 +17289,7 @@
<description>
Return the Unix-style locale string for the language currently in
effect. On Unix systems, this is the return value from
-&lt;literal&gt;setlocale(LC_CTYPE, NULL)&lt;/literal&gt;, and the user can
+<literal>setlocale(LC_CTYPE, NULL)</literal>, and the user can
affect this through the environment variables LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE or
LANG (checked in that order). The locale strings typically is in
the form lang_COUNTRY, where lang is an ISO-639 language code, and
@@ -16388,15 +17297,15 @@
Swedish as written in Finland or pt_BR for Portuguese as written in
Brazil.
-On Windows, the C library doesn't use any such environment
-variables, and setting them won't affect the behaviour of functions
+On Windows, the C library doesn't use any such environment
+variables, and setting them won't affect the behaviour of functions
like ctime(). The user sets the locale through the Regional Options
in the Control Panel. The C library (in the setlocale() function)
does not use country and language codes, but country and language
names spelled out in English.
However, this function does check the above environment
variables, and does return a Unix-style locale string based on
-either said environment variables or the thread's current locale.
+either said environment variables or the thread's current locale.
</description>
@@ -16411,7 +17320,7 @@
Renders an icon using gtk_style_render_icon(). In most cases,
gtk_widget_render_icon() is better, since it automatically provides
most of the arguments from the current widget settings. This
-function never returns %NULL; if the icon can't be rendered
+function never returns %NULL; if the icon can't be rendered
(perhaps because an image file fails to load), a default "missing
image" icon will be returned instead.
@@ -16436,7 +17345,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
<parameter_description> icon size. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1
-means render at the size of the source and don't scale.
+means render at the size of the source and don't scale.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
@@ -16458,7 +17367,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_free">
<description>
-Free's @reference. @reference may be %NULL.
+Free's @reference. @reference may be %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16472,11 +17381,13 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name">
<description>
-Gets the currently-selected font name. Note that this can be a different
-string than what you set with gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name(), as
-the font selection widget may normalize font names and thus return a string
-with a different structure. For example, "Helvetica Italic Bold 12" could be
-normalized to "Helvetica Bold Italic 12". Use pango_font_description_equal()
+Gets the currently-selected font name.
+
+Note that this can be a different string than what you set with
+gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name(), as the font selection widget
+may normalize font names and thus return a string with a different
+structure. For example, "Helvetica Italic Bold 12" could be normalized
+to "Helvetica Bold Italic 12". Use pango_font_description_equal()
if you want to compare two font descriptions.
@@ -16487,15 +17398,15 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A string with the name of the current font, or #NULL if no font
-is selected. You must free this string with g_free().
+<return> A string with the name of the current font, or %NULL if no
+font is selected. You must free this string with g_free().
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_set_visible">
<description>
Sets the ::visible property of the action to @visible. Note that
-this doesn't necessarily mean effective visibility. See
+this doesn't necessarily mean effective visibility. See
gtk_action_is_visible()
for that.
@@ -16570,7 +17481,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_char_count">
<description>
Gets the number of characters in the buffer; note that characters
-and bytes are not the same, you can't e.g. expect the contents of
+and bytes are not the same, you can't e.g. expect the contents of
the buffer in string form to be this many bytes long. The character
count is cached, so this function is very fast.
@@ -16586,6 +17497,27 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkEditable">
+<description>
+The ::changed signal is emitted at the end of a single
+user-visible operation on the contents of the #GtkEditable.
+
+E.g., a paste operation that replaces the contents of the
+selection will cause only one signal emission (even though it
+is implemented by first deleting the selection, then inserting
+the new content, and may cause multiple ::notify::text signals
+to be emitted).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_list_shortcut_folder_uris">
<description>
Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
@@ -16728,7 +17660,7 @@
<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_set_active">
<description>
Sets the status of the toggle tool button. Set to %TRUE if you
-want the GtkToggleButton to be 'pressed in', and %FALSE to raise it.
+want the GtkToggleButton to be 'pressed in', and %FALSE to raise it.
This action causes the toggled signal to be emitted.
Since: 2.4
@@ -16756,7 +17688,7 @@
gtk_icon_factory_add_default(). Then they pass the @stock_id to
widgets such as #GtkImage to display the icon. Themes can provide
an icon with the same name (such as "myapp-whatever-icon") to
-override your application's default icons. If an icon already
+override your application's default icons. If an icon already
existed in @factory for @stock_id, it is unreferenced and replaced
with the new @icon_set.
@@ -16781,7 +17713,7 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_pixbuf_column">
<description>
-Returns: the pixbuf column, or -1 if it's unset.
+Returns: the pixbuf column, or -1 if it's unset.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -16790,7 +17722,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the pixbuf column, or -1 if it's unset.
+<return> the pixbuf column, or -1 if it's unset.
Since: 2.6
</return>
@@ -17018,7 +17950,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> new 0-terminated C string, needs to be releaed with g_free().
+<return> new 0-terminated C string, needs to be released with g_free().
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -17063,21 +17995,21 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_column">
+<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Return value: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+Creates a new #GtkCheckMenuItem containing a label. The label
+will be created using gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic(), so underscores
+in @label indicate the mnemonic for the menu item.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
-used, or -1 if this is disabled.
-
-Since: 2.12
+<return> a new #GtkCheckMenuItem
</return>
</function>
@@ -17160,10 +18092,31 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_set_digits">
+<description>
+Sets the number of decimal places that are displayed in the value.
+Also causes the value of the adjustment to be rounded off to this
+number of digits, so the retrieved value matches the value the user saw.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="digits">
+<parameter_description> the number of decimal places to display,
+e.g. use 1 to display 1.0, 2 to display 1.00, etc
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_group_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkActionGroup object. The name of the action group
-is used when associating &lt;link linkend="Action-Accel"&gt;keybindings&lt;/link&gt;
+is used when associating <link linkend="Action-Accel">keybindings</link>
with the actions.
@@ -17220,7 +18173,7 @@
<description>
Creates a dynamically-allocated copy of an iterator. This function
is not useful in applications, because iterators can be copied with a
-simple assignment (&lt;literal&gt;GtkTextIter i = j;&lt;/literal&gt;). The
+simple assignment (<literal>GtkTextIter i = j;</literal>). The
function is used by language bindings.
@@ -17256,21 +18209,17 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_widget_set_pointer_window">
+<function name="_gtk_socket_add_window">
<description>
-Sets pointer window for @widget. Does not ref @pointer_window.
-Actually stores it on the #GdkScreen, but you don't need to know that.
+ socket: a #GtkSocket
+ xid: the native identifier for a window
+ need_reparent: whether the socket's plug's window needs to be
+reparented to the socket
+
+Adds a window to a GtkSocket.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pointer_window">
-<parameter_description> the new pointer window.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -17367,7 +18316,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if window shouldn't be in pager
+<return> %TRUE if window shouldn't be in pager
Since: 2.2
</return>
@@ -17409,7 +18358,7 @@
tooltips the row returned will be the cursor row. When %TRUE, then any of
@model, @path and @iter which have been provided will be set to point to
that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
-to be relative to @tree_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
+to be relative to @tree_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
</description>
@@ -17468,6 +18417,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_defer_drawing">
+<description>
+Sets up the #GtkPrintOperation to wait for calling of
+gtk_print_operation_draw_page_finish() from application. It can
+be used for drawing page in another thread.
+
+This function must be called in the callback of "draw-page" signal.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_group_get_visible">
<description>
Return value: %TRUE if the group is visible.
@@ -17501,6 +18470,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_horizontal">
+<description>
+Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_cursor_position">
<description>
Moves @iter forward to the previous visible cursor position. See
@@ -17576,7 +18563,7 @@
<function name="gtk_layout_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkLayout. Unless you have a specific adjustment
-you'd like the layout to use for scrolling, pass %NULL for
+you'd like the layout to use for scrolling, pass %NULL for
@hadjustment and @vadjustment.
@@ -17600,12 +18587,12 @@
Creates a text mark. Add it to a buffer using gtk_text_buffer_add_mark().
If @name is %NULL, the mark is anonymous; otherwise, the mark can be
retrieved by name using gtk_text_buffer_get_mark(). If a mark has left
-gravity, and text is inserted at the mark's current location, the mark
+gravity, and text is inserted at the mark's current location, the mark
will be moved to the left of the newly-inserted text. If the mark has
right gravity (@left_gravity = %FALSE), the mark will end up on the
right of newly-inserted text. The standard left-to-right cursor is a
mark with right gravity (when you type, the cursor stays on the right
-side of the text you're typing).
+side of the text you're typing).
</description>
@@ -17779,7 +18766,7 @@
<function name="GtkTextView">
<description>
The ::toggle-cursor-visible signal is a
-&lt;link linkend="keybinding-signals"&gt;keybinding signal&lt;/link&gt;
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
which gets emitted to toggle the visibility of the cursor.
The default binding for this signal is F7.
@@ -17799,7 +18786,7 @@
Sets the size of the column in pixels. This is meaningful only if the sizing
type is #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED. The size of the column is clamped to
the min/max width for the column. Please note that the min/max width of the
-column doesn't actually affect the "fixed_width" property of the widget, just
+column doesn't actually affect the "fixed_width" property of the widget, just
the actual size when displayed.
</description>
@@ -17876,13 +18863,29 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="needs_redraws">
-<parameter_description> the new value for the container's @reallocate_redraws flag
+<parameter_description> the new value for the container's @reallocate_redraws flag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_get_default">
+<description>
+Gets a unique instance of #GtkRecentManager, that you can share
+in your application without caring about memory management. The
+returned instance will be freed when you application terminates.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> A unique #GtkRecentManager. Do not ref or unref it.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_collapse_all">
<description>
Recursively collapses all visible, expanded nodes in @tree_view.
@@ -18206,7 +19209,7 @@
will remain a valid node after this function has been called.
If @parent is %NULL returns the first node, equivalent to
-&lt;literal&gt;gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);&lt;/literal&gt;
+<literal>gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);</literal>
</description>
@@ -18251,7 +19254,7 @@
function. The bitfield @needed which is passed in provides information
about what sorts of information that the filter function needs;
this allows GTK+ to avoid retrieving expensive information when
-it isn't needed by the filter.
+it isn't needed by the filter.
Since: 2.4
@@ -18288,7 +19291,7 @@
Sets the maximum value of the adjustment.
Note that values will be restricted by
-&lt;literal&gt;upper - page-size&lt;/literal&gt; if the page-size
+<literal>upper - page-size</literal> if the page-size
property is nonzero.
See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
@@ -18311,30 +19314,12 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_attr_appearance_new">
-<description>
-Create a new font description attribute. (This attribute
-allows setting family, style, weight, variant, stretch,
-and size simultaneously.)
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="desc">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return>
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_dialog_add_action_widget">
<description>
Adds an activatable widget to the action area of a #GtkDialog,
connecting a signal handler that will emit the #GtkDialog::response
signal on the dialog when the widget is activated. The widget is
-appended to the end of the dialog's action area. If you want to add a
+appended to the end of the dialog's action area. If you want to add a
non-activatable widget, simply pack it into the @action_area field
of the #GtkDialog struct.
@@ -18363,15 +19348,15 @@
with the canonical @accel_key and @accel_mods for this path.
To change the accelerator during runtime programatically, use
gtk_accel_map_change_entry().
-The accelerator path must consist of "&lt;WINDOWTYPE&gt;/Category1/Category2/.../Action",
-where &lt;WINDOWTYPE&gt; should be a unique application-specific identifier, that
+The accelerator path must consist of "<WINDOWTYPE>/Category1/Category2/.../Action",
+where <WINDOWTYPE> should be a unique application-specific identifier, that
corresponds to the kind of window the accelerator is being used in, e.g. "Gimp-Image",
"Abiword-Document" or "Gnumeric-Settings".
The Category1/.../Action portion is most appropriately chosen by the action the
-accelerator triggers, i.e. for accelerators on menu items, choose the item's menu path,
+accelerator triggers, i.e. for accelerators on menu items, choose the item's menu path,
e.g. "File/Save As", "Image/View/Zoom" or "Edit/Select All".
So a full valid accelerator path may look like:
-"&lt;Gimp-Toolbox&gt;/File/Dialogs/Tool Options...".
+"<Gimp-Toolbox>/File/Dialogs/Tool Options...".
Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
@@ -18422,7 +19407,7 @@
<function name="gtk_printer_get_capabilities">
<description>
-Return value: the printer's capabilities
+Return value: the printer's capabilities
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -18431,7 +19416,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the printer's capabilities
+<return> the printer's capabilities
Since: 2.12
</return>
@@ -18553,7 +19538,7 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_direction">
<description>
Obtains the text direction this icon source applies to. The return
-value is only useful/meaningful if the text direction is &lt;emphasis&gt;not&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+value is only useful/meaningful if the text direction is <emphasis>not</emphasis>
wildcarded.
@@ -18683,7 +19668,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_shape_combine_mask">
<description>
-Sets a shape for this widget's GDK window. This allows for
+Sets a shape for this widget's GDK window. This allows for
transparent windows etc., see gdk_window_shape_combine_mask()
for more information.
@@ -18713,7 +19698,7 @@
<description>
Undoes the effect of
gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_source(). Calling this method sets
-reorderable to %FALSE.
+#GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -18841,7 +19826,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the response id of @widget, or %GTK_RESPONSE_NONE
-if @widget doesn't have a response id set.
+if @widget doesn't have a response id set.
Since: 2.8
</return>
@@ -18849,8 +19834,8 @@
<function name="gtk_menu_bar_get_pack_direction">
<description>
-Retrieves the current pack direction of the menubar. See
-gtk_menu_bar_set_pack_direction().
+Retrieves the current pack direction of the menubar.
+See gtk_menu_bar_set_pack_direction().
</description>
@@ -18896,7 +19881,7 @@
The reason for doing this operation as a callback
is so that if the operation performed with the
path and iter results in referencing the node
-and/or parent nodes, we don't load all the information
+and/or parent nodes, we don't load all the information
about the nodes.
This function is particularly useful for expanding
@@ -19167,7 +20152,7 @@
<function name="gtk_menu_item_set_submenu">
<description>
-Sets or replaces the menu item's submenu, or removes it when a %NULL
+Sets or replaces the menu item's submenu, or removes it when a %NULL
submenu is passed.
</description>
@@ -19221,7 +20206,7 @@
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_file">
<description>
-Parses a file containing a &lt;link linkend="XML-UI"&gt;UI definition&lt;/link&gt; and
+Parses a file containing a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> and
merges it with the current contents of @self.
@@ -19437,7 +20422,7 @@
<description>
Sets the colormap for the widget to the given value. Widget must not
have been previously realized. This probably should only be used
-from an &lt;function&gt;init()&lt;/function&gt; function (i.e. from the constructor
+from an <function>init()</function> function (i.e. from the constructor
for the widget).
</description>
@@ -19560,7 +20545,7 @@
<function name="gtk_range_set_lower_stepper_sensitivity">
<description>
Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
-'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
+'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
Since: 2.10
@@ -19571,7 +20556,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="sensitivity">
-<parameter_description> the lower stepper's sensitivity policy.
+<parameter_description> the lower stepper's sensitivity policy.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -19722,7 +20707,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
@@ -19805,22 +20790,22 @@
<function name="gtk_hsv_is_adjusting">
<description>
-An HSV color selector can be said to be adjusting if multiple rapid changes
-are being made to its value, for example, when the user is adjusting the
-value with the mouse. This function queries whether the HSV color selector
-is being adjusted or not.
+An HSV color selector can be said to be adjusting if multiple rapid
+changes are being made to its value, for example, when the user is
+adjusting the value with the mouse. This function queries whether
+the HSV color selector is being adjusted or not.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="hsv">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter_description> A #GtkHSV
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value, since
-they may be transitory, or FALSE if they should consider the color value
-status to be final.
+<return> %TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value,
+since they may be transitory, or %FALSE if they should consider
+the color value status to be final.
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -19829,23 +20814,23 @@
<function name="gtk_window_set_keep_above">
<description>
Asks to keep @window above, so that it stays on top. Note that
-you shouldn't assume the window is definitely above afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;) could not keep it above,
+you shouldn't assume the window is definitely above afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could not keep it above,
and not all window managers support keeping windows above. But
-normally the window will end kept above. Just don't write code
+normally the window will end kept above. Just don't write code
that crashes if not.
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
in which case the window will be kept above when it appears onscreen
initially.
You can track the above state via the "window-state-event" signal
on #GtkWidget.
-Note that, according to the &lt;ulink
-url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec"&gt;Extended Window
-Manager Hints&lt;/ulink&gt; specification, the above state is mainly meant
+Note that, according to the <ulink
+url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec">Extended Window
+Manager Hints</ulink> specification, the above state is mainly meant
for user preferences and should not be used by applications e.g. for
drawing attention to their dialogs.
@@ -20050,6 +21035,32 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_from_pixbuf">
+<description>
+Sets the icon shown in the specified position using a pixbuf.
+
+If @pixbuf is %NULL, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_set_arrow_tooltip">
<description>
Sets the #GtkTooltips object to be used for arrow button which
@@ -20083,6 +21094,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_get_value_pos">
+<description>
+Gets the position in which the current value is displayed.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the position in which the current value is displayed
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_button_set_font_name">
<description>
Sets or updates the currently-displayed font in font picker dialog.
@@ -20111,21 +21138,21 @@
Makes all newly-created widgets as composite children until
the corresponding gtk_widget_pop_composite_child() call.
-A composite child is a child that's an implementation detail of the
-container it's inside and should not be visible to people using the
-container. Composite children aren't treated differently by GTK (but
+A composite child is a child that's an implementation detail of the
+container it's inside and should not be visible to people using the
+container. Composite children aren't treated differently by GTK (but
see gtk_container_foreach() vs. gtk_container_forall()), but e.g. GUI
builders might want to treat them in a different way.
Here is a simple example:
|[
gtk_widget_push_composite_child ();
-scrolled_window-&gt;hscrollbar = gtk_hscrollbar_new (hadjustment);
-gtk_widget_set_composite_name (scrolled_window-&gt;hscrollbar, "hscrollbar");
+scrolled_window->hscrollbar = gtk_hscrollbar_new (hadjustment);
+gtk_widget_set_composite_name (scrolled_window->hscrollbar, "hscrollbar");
gtk_widget_pop_composite_child ();
-gtk_widget_set_parent (scrolled_window-&gt;hscrollbar,
+gtk_widget_set_parent (scrolled_window->hscrollbar,
GTK_WIDGET (scrolled_window));
-g_object_ref (scrolled_window-&gt;hscrollbar);
+g_object_ref (scrolled_window->hscrollbar);
]|
</description>
@@ -20136,7 +21163,12 @@
<function name="gtk_font_button_get_font_name">
<description>
-Retrieves the name of the currently selected font.
+Retrieves the name of the currently selected font. This name includes
+style and size information as well. If you want to render something
+with the font, use this string with pango_font_description_from_string() .
+If you're interested in peeking certain values (family name,
+style, size, weight) just query these properties from the
+#PangoFontDescription object.
</description>
@@ -20176,7 +21208,7 @@
<function name="gtk_label_get_use_markup">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
+Return value: %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20185,7 +21217,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
+<return> %TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
</return>
</function>
@@ -20232,14 +21264,14 @@
<function name="gtk_container_propagate_expose">
<description>
When a container receives an expose event, it must send synthetic
-expose events to all children that don't have their own #GdkWindows.
+expose events to all children that don't have their own #GdkWindows.
This function provides a convenient way of doing this. A container,
when it receives an expose event, calls gtk_container_propagate_expose()
once for each child, passing in the event the container received.
gtk_container_propagate_expose() takes care of deciding whether
an expose event needs to be sent to the child, intersecting
-the event's area with the child area, and sending the event.
+the event's area with the child area, and sending the event.
In most cases, a container can simply either simply inherit the
#GtkWidget::expose implementation from #GtkContainer, or, do some drawing
@@ -20265,7 +21297,7 @@
<function name="gtk_layout_freeze">
<description>
-This is a deprecated function, it doesn't do anything useful.
+This is a deprecated function, it doesn't do anything useful.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20280,8 +21312,8 @@
<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_markup">
<description>
Sets the text of the message dialog to be @str, which is marked
-up with the &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text markup
-language&lt;/link&gt;.
+up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup
+language</link>.
Since: 2.4
@@ -20292,7 +21324,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> markup string (see &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango markup format&lt;/link&gt;)
+<parameter_description> markup string (see <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -20337,7 +21369,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> The currently selected filename, or %NULL
-if no file is selected, or the selected file can't
+if no file is selected, or the selected file can't
be represented with a local filename. Free with g_free().
Since: 2.4
@@ -20459,6 +21491,21 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment">
+<description>
+Returns: the vertical #GtkAdjustment
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the vertical #GtkAdjustment
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_visible">
<description>
Sets the visibility of @tree_column.
@@ -20482,7 +21529,7 @@
This function will generate keyboard press and release events in
the middle of the first GdkWindow found that belongs to @widget.
For %GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets like GtkButton, this will often be an
-input-only event window. For other widgets, this is usually widget-&gt;window.
+input-only event window. For other widgets, this is usually widget->window.
Certain caveats should be considered when using this function, in
particular because the mouse pointer is warped to the key press
location, see gdk_test_simulate_key() for details.
@@ -20591,7 +21638,7 @@
<parameter name="new_order">
<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the new position of each child
to its old position before the re-ordering,
-i.e. @new_order&lt;literal&gt;[newpos] = oldpos&lt;/literal&gt;.
+i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -20601,7 +21648,7 @@
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_completion_prefix">
<description>
Get the original text entered by the user that triggered
-the completion or %NULL if there's no completion ongoing.
+the completion or %NULL if there's no completion ongoing.
</description>
@@ -20619,7 +21666,7 @@
<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_image">
<description>
-Sets the dialog's image to @image.
+Sets the dialog's image to @image.
Since: 2.10
@@ -20655,24 +21702,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_append_text">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_gicon">
<description>
-Appends the given text to the contents of the widget.
+Gets the gicon of @action.
-Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_insert_text() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the text to append
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The action's #GIcon if one is set.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_row_separator_func">
@@ -20695,7 +21740,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_range">
<description>
Copies text, tags, and pixbufs between @start and @end (the order
-of @start and @end doesn't matter) and inserts the copy at @iter.
+of @start and @end doesn't matter) and inserts the copy at @iter.
Used instead of simply getting/inserting text because it preserves
images and tags. If @start and @end are in a different buffer from
@buffer, the two buffers must share the same tag table.
@@ -20725,6 +21770,39 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action">
+<description>
+This is a utility function for #GtkActivatable implementors.
+
+When implementing #GtkActivatable you must call this when
+handling changes of the #GtkActivatable:related-action, and
+you must also use this to break references in #GObject->dispose().
+
+This function adds a reference to the currently set related
+action for you, it also makes sure the #GtkActivatable->update()
+method is called when the related #GtkAction properties change
+and registers to the action's proxy list.
+
+<note><para>Be careful to call this before setting the local
+copy of the #GtkAction property, since this function uses
+gtk_activatable_get_action() to retrieve the previous action</para></note>
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAction to set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_email_hook">
<description>
Installs a global function to be called whenever the user activates an
@@ -20872,7 +21950,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The tag's priority.
+<return> The tag's priority.
</return>
</function>
@@ -21011,6 +22089,22 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_hscrollbar_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new horizontal scrollbar.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GtkHScrollbar
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_im_context_get_preedit_string">
<description>
Retrieve the current preedit string for the input context,
@@ -21054,7 +22148,7 @@
gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords().
Note that this is different from gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_location(),
-which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions &lt;emphasis&gt;between&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions <emphasis>between</emphasis>
characters.
Since: 2.6
@@ -21070,7 +22164,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="trailing">
-<parameter_description> location to store an integer indicating where
+<parameter_description> if non-%NULL, location to store an integer indicating where
in the grapheme the user clicked. It will either be
zero, or the number of characters in the grapheme.
0 represents the trailing edge of the grapheme.
@@ -21096,7 +22190,7 @@
values given to this function.
Calling
-&lt;literal&gt;gtk_list_store_insert_with_values(list_store, iter, position...)&lt;/literal&gt;
+<literal>gtk_list_store_insert_with_values(list_store, iter, position...)</literal>
has the same effect as calling
|[
gtk_list_store_insert (list_store, iter, position);
@@ -21163,10 +22257,28 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="_gtk_im_module_create">
+<description>
+Create an IM context of a type specified by the string
+ID @context_id.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> the context ID for the context type to create
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a newly created input context of or @context_id, or
+if that could not be created, a newly created GtkIMContextSimple.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path">
<description>
Set the accelerator path on @menu_item, through which runtime changes of the
-menu item's accelerator caused by the user can be identified and saved to
+menu item's accelerator caused by the user can be identified and saved to
persistant storage (see gtk_accel_map_save() on this).
To setup a default accelerator for this menu item, call
gtk_accel_map_add_entry() with the same @accel_path.
@@ -21191,7 +22303,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> accelerator path, corresponding to this menu item's
+<parameter_description> accelerator path, corresponding to this menu item's
functionality, or %NULL to unset the current path.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -21235,6 +22347,12 @@
<description>
Sets the cursor position in the editable to the given value.
+The cursor is displayed before the character with the given (base 0)
+index in the contents of the editable. The value must be less than or
+equal to the number of characters in the editable. A value of -1
+indicates that the position should be set after the last character
+of the editable. Note that @position is in characters, not in bytes.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="editable">
@@ -21242,12 +22360,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the position of the cursor. The cursor is displayed
-before the character with the given (base 0) index in the editable.
-The value must be less than or equal to the number of characters
-in the editable. A value of -1 indicates that the position should
-be set after the last character of the editable. Note that this
-position is in characters, not in bytes.
+<parameter_description> the position of the cursor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -21468,13 +22581,33 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_list">
<description>
-Adds a widget to the list of mnemonic labels for
-this widget. (See gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels()). Note the
-list of mnemonic labels for the widget is cleared when the
-widget is destroyed, so the caller must make sure to update
-its internal state at this point as well, by using a connection
+Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
+had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them to set up a
+window-specific icon list. This function allows you to set up the
+icon for all windows in your app at once.
+
+See gtk_window_set_icon_list() for more details.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a list of #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label">
+<description>
+Adds a widget to the list of mnemonic labels for
+this widget. (See gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels()). Note the
+list of mnemonic labels for the widget is cleared when the
+widget is destroyed, so the caller must make sure to update
+its internal state at this point as well, by using a connection
to the #GtkWidget::destroy signal or a weak notifier.
Since: 2.4
@@ -21635,7 +22768,7 @@
if a user tries to modify the accelerator of a menuitem associated with
the action. Therefore you must either set the accel path yourself with
gtk_action_set_accel_path(), or use
-&lt;literal&gt;gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel (..., NULL)&lt;/literal&gt;.
+<literal>gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel (..., NULL)</literal>.
Since: 2.4
@@ -21812,7 +22945,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset">
<description>
-This function registers GTK+'s internal rich text serialization
+This function registers GTK+'s internal rich text serialization
format with the passed @buffer. See
gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() for details.
@@ -21829,7 +22962,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
-format's mime-type.
+format's mime-type.
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -21878,6 +23011,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paned_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkPaned widget.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the paned's orientation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkPaned.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog">
<description>
Runs a page setup dialog, letting the user modify the values from
@@ -21951,7 +23102,7 @@
Creates a dynamically allocated tree iterator as a copy of @iter.
This function is not intended for use in applications, because you
can just copy the structs by value
-(&lt;literal&gt;GtkTreeIter new_iter = iter;&lt;/literal&gt;).
+(<literal>GtkTreeIter new_iter = iter;</literal>).
You must free this iter with gtk_tree_iter_free().
@@ -22007,7 +23158,7 @@
When handling this signal, use gtk_color_button_get_color() and
gtk_color_button_get_alpha() to find out which color was just selected.
-Note that this signal is only emitted when the &lt;emphasis&gt;user&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+Note that this signal is only emitted when the <emphasis>user</emphasis>
changes the color. If you need to react to programmatic color changes
as well, use the notify::color signal.
@@ -22111,34 +23262,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_text_util_get_block_cursor_location">
-<description>
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="index">
-<parameter_description> index at which cursor is located
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description> cursor location
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="at_line_end">
-<parameter_description> whether cursor is drawn at line end, not over some
-character
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether cursor should actually be drawn as a rectangle.
-It may not be the case if character at index is invisible.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_is_cursor_position">
<description>
See gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() or #PangoLogAttr or
@@ -22184,7 +23307,7 @@
<description>
Computes the effect of any tags applied to this spot in the
text. The @values parameter should be initialized to the default
-settings you wish to use if no tags are in effect. You'd typically
+settings you wish to use if no tags are in effect. You'd typically
obtain the defaults from gtk_text_view_get_default_attributes().
gtk_text_iter_get_attributes () will modify @values, applying the
@@ -22222,13 +23345,13 @@
empty. The visible function should therefore take special care of empty
rows, like in the example below.
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+<informalexample><programlisting>
static gboolean
visible_func (GtkTreeModel *model,
GtkTreeIter *iter,
gpointer data)
{
-/&ast; Visible if row is non-empty and first column is "HI" &ast;/
+/* Visible if row is non-empty and first column is "HI" */
gchar *str;
gboolean visible = FALSE;
@@ -22239,7 +23362,7 @@
return visible;
}
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+</programlisting></informalexample>
Since: 2.4
@@ -22269,7 +23392,7 @@
<description>
Obtains an iterator pointing to @byte_index within the given line.
@byte_index must be the start of a UTF-8 character, and must not be
-beyond the end of the line. Note &lt;emphasis&gt;bytes&lt;/emphasis&gt;, not
+beyond the end of the line. Note <emphasis>bytes</emphasis>, not
characters; UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.
</description>
@@ -22312,11 +23435,32 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_set_visible_horizontal">
+<description>
+Sets whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
+<parameter_description> whether the action is visible horizontally
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="GtkEntry">
<description>
-Sets the text area's border between the text and the frame.
+Indicates whether to pass a proper widget state when
+drawing the shadow and the widget background.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -22526,14 +23670,14 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_destroy">
<description>
Destroys a widget. Equivalent to gtk_object_destroy(), except that
-you don't have to cast the widget to #GtkObject. When a widget is
+you don't have to cast the widget to #GtkObject. When a widget is
destroyed, it will break any references it holds to other objects.
If the widget is inside a container, the widget will be removed
from the container. If the widget is a toplevel (derived from
#GtkWindow), it will be removed from the list of toplevels, and the
reference GTK+ holds to it will be removed. Removing a
widget from its container or the list of toplevels results in the
-widget being finalized, unless you've added additional references
+widget being finalized, unless you've added additional references
to the widget with g_object_ref().
In most cases, only toplevel widgets (windows) require explicit
@@ -22572,7 +23716,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_drag_source_drag_data_get">
<description>
Asks the #GtkTreeDragSource to fill in @selection_data with a
-representation of the row at @path. @selection_data-&gt;target gives
+representation of the row at @path. @selection_data->target gives
the required type of the data. Should robustly handle a @path no
longer found in the model!
@@ -22613,7 +23757,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="tab_label">
<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="position">
@@ -22627,25 +23771,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query">
-<description>
-Triggers a new tooltip query on @display, in order to update the current
-visible tooltip, or to show/hide the current tooltip. This function is
-useful to call when, for example, the state of the widget changed by a
-key press.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_deserialize_set_can_create_tags">
<description>
Use this function to allow a rich text deserialization function to
@@ -22662,7 +23787,7 @@
You should allow creation of tags only if you know what you are
doing, e.g. if you defined a tagset name for your application
-suite's text buffers and you know that it's fine to receive new
+suite's text buffers and you know that it's fine to receive new
tags from these buffers, because you know that your application can
handle the newly created tags.
@@ -22689,19 +23814,19 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_get_child_requisition">
<description>
This function is only for use in widget implementations. Obtains
- widget-&gt;requisition, unless someone has forced a particular
+ widget->requisition, unless someone has forced a particular
geometry on the widget (e.g. with gtk_widget_set_size_request()),
-in which case it returns that geometry instead of the widget's
+in which case it returns that geometry instead of the widget's
requisition.
This function differs from gtk_widget_size_request() in that
-it retrieves the last size request value from @widget-&gt;requisition,
+it retrieves the last size request value from @widget->requisition,
while gtk_widget_size_request() actually calls the "size_request" method
-on @widget to compute the size request and fill in @widget-&gt;requisition,
-and only then returns @widget-&gt;requisition.
+on @widget to compute the size request and fill in @widget->requisition,
+and only then returns @widget->requisition.
Because this function does not call the "size_request" method, it
-can only be used when you know that @widget-&gt;requisition is
+can only be used when you know that @widget->requisition is
up-to-date, that is, gtk_widget_size_request() has been called
since the last time a resize was queued. In general, only container
implementations have this information; applications should use
@@ -22721,6 +23846,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step">
+<description>
+Sets the fraction of total entry width to move the progress
+bouncing block for each call to gtk_entry_progress_pulse().
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fraction">
+<parameter_description> fraction between 0.0 and 1.0
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toolbar_prepend_item">
<description>
Adds a new button to the beginning (top or left edges) of the given toolbar.
@@ -22748,7 +23894,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="callback">
@@ -22766,6 +23912,26 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_menu_item_set_label">
+<description>
+Sets @text on the @menu_item label
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text you want to set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_accel_path">
<description>
Retrieve the accelerator path that was previously set on @menu_item.
@@ -22780,7 +23946,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the accelerator path corresponding to this menu item's
+<return> the accelerator path corresponding to this menu item's
functionality, or %NULL if not set
Since: 2.14
@@ -22895,40 +24061,11 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="gdk_image">
-<parameter_description> return location for a #GtkImage
+<parameter_description> return location for a #GtkImage, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> return location for a #GdkBitmap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="_gtk_text_util_append_special_char_menuitems">
-<description>
-Add menuitems for various bidi control characters to a menu;
-the menuitems, when selected, will call the given function
-with the chosen character.
-
-This function is private/internal in GTK 2.0, the functionality may
-become public sometime, but it probably needs more thought first.
-e.g. maybe there should be a way to just get the list of items,
-instead of requiring the menu items to be created.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="menushell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuShell
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> call this when an item is chosen
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data for callback
+<parameter_description> return location for a #GdkBitmap, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -22976,7 +24113,7 @@
<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_file">
<description>
Obtains the path to the IM modules file. See the documentation
-of the &lt;link linkend="im-module-file"&gt;&lt;envar&gt;GTK_IM_MODULE_FILE&lt;/envar&gt;&lt;/link&gt;
+of the <link linkend="im-module-file"><envar>GTK_IM_MODULE_FILE</envar></link>
environment variable for more details.
</description>
@@ -23028,7 +24165,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_ensure_style">
<description>
-Ensures that @widget has a style (@widget-&gt;style). Not a very useful
+Ensures that @widget has a style (@widget->style). Not a very useful
function; most of the time, if you want the style, the widget is
realized, and realized widgets are guaranteed to have a style
already.
@@ -23055,10 +24192,10 @@
icons, they are in a 1000x1000 coordinate space that is scaled
to the final size of the icon. You can determine if the icon is an SVG
icon by using gtk_icon_info_get_filename(), and seeing if it is non-%NULL
-and ends in '.svg'.
+and ends in '.svg'.
This function is provided primarily to allow compatibility wrappers
-for older API's, and is not expected to be useful for applications.
+for older API's, and is not expected to be useful for applications.
Since: 2.4
@@ -23099,8 +24236,8 @@
in. Note that only types derived from standard GObject fundamental types
are supported.
-As an example, &lt;literal&gt;gtk_tree_store_new (3, G_TYPE_INT, G_TYPE_STRING,
-GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF);&lt;/literal&gt; will create a new #GtkListStore with three columns, of type
+As an example, <literal>gtk_tree_store_new (3, G_TYPE_INT, G_TYPE_STRING,
+GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF);</literal> will create a new #GtkListStore with three columns, of type
int, string and #GdkPixbuf respectively.
@@ -23154,6 +24291,38 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkFontSelection.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a n ew #GtkFontSelection
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_use_underline">
+<description>
+Checks if an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
+used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if an embedded underline in the label indicates
+the mnemonic accelerator key.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="_gtk_path_bar_down">
<description>
If the selected button in the pathbar is not the furthest button "down" (in the
@@ -23174,7 +24343,7 @@
A #GtkRcPropertyParser for use with gtk_settings_install_property_parser()
or gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser() which parses a
requisition in the form
-&lt;literal&gt;"{ width, height }"&lt;/literal&gt; for integers %width and %height.
+<literal>"{ width, height }"</literal> for integers %width and %height.
</description>
@@ -23243,9 +24412,9 @@
<function name="GtkToolItem">
<description>
-This signal is emitted when the toolitem's tooltip changes.
+This signal is emitted when the toolitem's tooltip changes.
Application developers can use gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip() to
-set the item's tooltip.
+set the item's tooltip.
</description>
@@ -23366,7 +24535,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
+<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
@@ -23384,7 +24553,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_model_iter_parent">
<description>
Sets @iter to be the parent of @child. If @child is at the toplevel, and
-doesn't have a parent, then @iter is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE
+doesn't have a parent, then @iter is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE
is returned. @child will remain a valid node after this function has been
called.
@@ -23415,7 +24584,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -23434,9 +24603,9 @@
returned widget; it should not be unreferenced.
Note the difference in behavior vs. gtk_widget_get_ancestor();
-&lt;literal&gt;gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_WINDOW)&lt;/literal&gt;
+<literal>gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_WINDOW)</literal>
would return
-%NULL if @widget wasn't inside a toplevel window, and if the
+%NULL if @widget wasn't inside a toplevel window, and if the
window was inside a #GtkWindow-derived widget which was in turn
inside the toplevel #GtkWindow. While the second case may
seem unlikely, it actually happens when a #GtkPlug is embedded
@@ -23449,7 +24618,7 @@
GtkWidget *toplevel = gtk_widget_get_toplevel (widget);
if (GTK_WIDGET_TOPLEVEL (toplevel))
{
-/&ast; Perform action on toplevel. &ast;/
+ ... Perform action on toplevel. ...
}
]|
@@ -23462,7 +24631,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the topmost ancestor of @widget, or @widget itself
-if there's no ancestor.
+if there's no ancestor.
</return>
</function>
@@ -23587,7 +24756,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the target of the label's mnemonic, or %NULL if none
+<return> the target of the label's mnemonic, or %NULL if none
has been set and the default algorithm will be used.
</return>
</function>
@@ -23607,7 +24776,7 @@
<function name="gtk_separator_tool_item_get_draw">
<description>
-Return value: #TRUE if @separator_tool_item is drawn as a line, or just blank.
+Return value: %TRUE if @item is drawn as a line, or just blank.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -23616,12 +24785,27 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> #TRUE if @separator_tool_item is drawn as a line, or just blank.
+<return> %TRUE if @item is drawn as a line, or just blank.
Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment">
+<description>
+Returns: the horizontal #GtkAdjustment
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the horizontal #GtkAdjustment
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_value">
<description>
Get the value in the @spin_button.
@@ -23871,7 +25055,7 @@
<function name="gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size">
<description>
This function sets the size of stock icons in the toolbar. You
-can call it both before you add the icons and after they've been
+can call it both before you add the icons and after they've been
added. The size you set will override user preferences for the default
icon size.
@@ -24000,15 +25184,15 @@
<function name="gtk_window_set_decorated">
<description>
By default, windows are decorated with a title bar, resize
-controls, etc. Some &lt;link linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window
-managers&lt;/link&gt; allow GTK+ to disable these decorations, creating a
+controls, etc. Some <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window
+managers</link> allow GTK+ to disable these decorations, creating a
borderless window. If you set the decorated property to %FALSE
using this function, GTK+ will do its best to convince the window
manager not to decorate the window. Depending on the system, this
function may not have any effect when called on a window that is
already visible, so you should call it before calling gtk_window_show().
-On Windows, this function always works, since there's no window manager
+On Windows, this function always works, since there's no window manager
policy involved.
@@ -24055,7 +25239,7 @@
<description>
Obtains a copy of the default text attributes. These are the
attributes used for text unless a tag overrides them.
-You'd typically pass the default attributes in to
+You'd typically pass the default attributes in to
gtk_text_iter_get_attributes() in order to get the
attributes in effect at a given text position.
@@ -24274,13 +25458,13 @@
<description>
Updates the visibility of @proxy from the visibility of @action
according to the following rules:
-&lt;itemizedlist&gt;
-&lt;listitem&gt;&lt;para&gt;if @action is invisible, @proxy is too
-&lt;/para&gt;&lt;/listitem&gt;
-&lt;listitem&gt;&lt;para&gt;if @empty is %TRUE, hide @proxy unless the "hide-if-empty"
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>if @action is invisible, @proxy is too
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>if @empty is %TRUE, hide @proxy unless the "hide-if-empty"
property of @action indicates otherwise
-&lt;/para&gt;&lt;/listitem&gt;
-&lt;/itemizedlist&gt;
+</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
This function is used in the implementation of #GtkUIManager.
@@ -24353,7 +25537,7 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_size">
<description>
Obtains the icon size this source applies to. The return value
-is only useful/meaningful if the icon size is &lt;emphasis&gt;not&lt;/emphasis&gt; wildcarded.
+is only useful/meaningful if the icon size is <emphasis>not</emphasis> wildcarded.
</description>
@@ -24399,7 +25583,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="markup">
@@ -24416,7 +25600,7 @@
of built-in icons is to allow an application or library
that uses themed icons to function requiring files to
be present in the file system. For instance, the default
-images for all of GTK+'s stock icons are registered
+images for all of GTK+'s stock icons are registered
as built-icons.
In general, if you use gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon()
@@ -24514,7 +25698,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_get_style">
<description>
-Simply an accessor function that returns @widget-&gt;style.
+Simply an accessor function that returns @widget->style.
</description>
@@ -24524,7 +25708,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the widget's #GtkStyle
+<return> the widget's #GtkStyle
</return>
</function>
@@ -24562,7 +25746,7 @@
(See gtk_icon_size_lookup_for_settings().)
Normally @size would be
#GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU, #GTK_ICON_SIZE_BUTTON, etc. This function
-isn't normally needed, gtk_widget_render_icon() is the usual
+isn't normally needed, gtk_widget_render_icon() is the usual
way to get an icon for rendering, then just look at the size of
the rendered pixbuf. The rendered pixbuf may not even correspond to
the width/height returned by gtk_icon_size_lookup(), because themes
@@ -24657,9 +25841,14 @@
<function name="gtk_label_set_attributes">
<description>
Sets a #PangoAttrList; the attributes in the list are applied to the
-label text. The attributes set with this function will be ignored
-if the #GtkLabel:use-underline" or #GtkLabel:use-markup properties
-are set to %TRUE.
+label text.
+
+<note><para>The attributes set with this function will be applied
+and merged with any other attributes previously effected by way
+of the #GtkLabel:use-underline or #GtkLabel:use-markup properties.
+While it is not recommended to mix markup strings with manually set
+attributes, if you must; know that the attributes will be applied
+to the label after the markup string is parsed.</para></note>
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -24715,7 +25904,7 @@
<description>
Sets the contents of the selection from a UTF-8 encoded string.
The string is converted to the form determined by
- selection_data-&gt;target.
+ selection_data->target.
</description>
@@ -24900,7 +26089,7 @@
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_uri">
<description>
-Selects the file to by @uri. If the URI doesn't refer to a
+Selects the file to by @uri. If the URI doesn't refer to a
file in the current folder of @chooser, then the current folder of
@chooser will be changed to the folder containing @filename.
@@ -25043,6 +26232,26 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_set_visible_vertical">
+<description>
+Sets whether @action is visible when vertical
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visible_vertical">
+<parameter_description> whether the action is visible vertically
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_rc_reset_styles">
<description>
This function recomputes the styles for all widgets that use a
@@ -25053,7 +26262,7 @@
both redraw and recompute any cached information about its
appearance. As an example, it is used when the default font size
set by the operating system changes. Note that this function
-doesn't affect widgets that have a style set explicitely on them
+doesn't affect widgets that have a style set explicitely on them
with gtk_widget_set_style().
Since: 2.4
@@ -25077,7 +26286,7 @@
consider functions such as gtk_box_pack_start() and
gtk_table_attach() as an alternative to gtk_container_add() in
those cases. A widget may be added to only one container at a time;
-you can't place the same widget inside two different containers.
+you can't place the same widget inside two different containers.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -25241,7 +26450,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry&lt;!-- --&gt;s
+<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry<!-- -->s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -25325,7 +26534,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="digits">
-<parameter_description> the number of digits after the decimal point to be displayed for the spin button's value
+<parameter_description> the number of digits after the decimal point to be displayed for the spin button's value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -25551,7 +26760,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_view_place_cursor_onscreen">
<description>
Moves the cursor to the currently visible region of the
-buffer, it it isn't there already.
+buffer, it it isn't there already.
</description>
@@ -25605,6 +26814,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_set_gicon">
+<description>
+Sets the icon of @action.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> the #GIcon to set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_icon_widget">
<description>
Return the widget used as icon widget on @button. See
@@ -25736,7 +26965,7 @@
another buffer, and if its name is not %NULL then there must not
be another mark in the buffer with the same name.
-Emits the "mark-set" signal as notification of the mark's initial
+Emits the "mark-set" signal as notification of the mark's initial
placement.
Since: 2.12
@@ -25907,6 +27136,30 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_from_file">
+<description>
+Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
+had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them from a file
+on disk. Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> location of icon file
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="err">
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
+
+Since: 2.2
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name">
<description>
Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
@@ -25985,9 +27238,9 @@
Sets a focus chain, overriding the one computed automatically by GTK+.
In principle each widget in the chain should be a descendant of the
-container, but this is not enforced by this method, since it's allowed
+container, but this is not enforced by this method, since it's allowed
to set the focus chain before you pack the widgets, or have a widget
-in the chain that isn't always packed. The necessary checks are done
+in the chain that isn't always packed. The necessary checks are done
when the focus chain is actually traversed.
</description>
@@ -26216,8 +27469,8 @@
<function name="gtk_entry_set_inner_border">
<description>
-Sets %entry's inner-border property to %border, or clears it if %NULL
-is passed. The inner-border is the area around the entry's text, but
+Sets %entry's inner-border property to %border, or clears it if %NULL
+is passed. The inner-border is the area around the entry's text, but
inside its frame.
If set, this property overrides the inner-border style property.
@@ -26308,7 +27561,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_view_move_mark_onscreen">
<description>
-Moves a mark within the buffer so that it's
+Moves a mark within the buffer so that it's
located within the currently-visible text area.
@@ -26323,7 +27576,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the mark moved (wasn't already onscreen)
+<return> %TRUE if the mark moved (wasn't already onscreen)
</return>
</function>
@@ -26340,7 +27593,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GtkMenuEntry&lt;!-- --&gt;s
+<parameter_description> an array of #GtkMenuEntry<!-- -->s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26384,6 +27637,8 @@
<description>
Sets whether a toolbar should appear horizontally or vertically.
+Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_orientable_set_orientation() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="toolbar">
@@ -26452,8 +27707,8 @@
The variable argument list should contain integer column numbers,
each column number followed by the value to be set.
The list is terminated by a -1. For example, to set column 0 with type
-%G_TYPE_STRING to "Foo", you would write &lt;literal&gt;gtk_list_store_set (store, iter,
-0, "Foo", -1)&lt;/literal&gt;.
+%G_TYPE_STRING to "Foo", you would write <literal>gtk_list_store_set (store, iter,
+0, "Foo", -1)</literal>.
The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
</description>
@@ -26476,7 +27731,7 @@
<function name="gtk_buildable_custom_tag_start">
<description>
-This is called for each unknown element under &lt;child&gt;.
+This is called for each unknown element under <child>.
</description>
@@ -26508,7 +27763,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if a object has a custom implementation, %FALSE
-if it doesn't.
+if it doesn't.
Since: 2.12
</return>
@@ -26548,6 +27803,22 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_clear_marks">
+<description>
+Removes any marks that have been added with gtk_scale_add_mark().
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_operation_is_finished">
<description>
A convenience function to find out if the print operation
@@ -26584,7 +27855,7 @@
This function copies @source, so you can reuse the same source immediately
without affecting the icon set.
-An example of when you'd use this function: a web browser's "Back
+An example of when you'd use this function: a web browser's "Back
to Previous Page" icon might point in a different direction in
Hebrew and in English; it might look different when insensitive;
and it might change size depending on toolbar mode (small/large
@@ -26618,7 +27889,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_child_notify">
<description>
Emits a #GtkWidget::child-notify signal for the
-&lt;link linkend="child-properties"&gt;child property&lt;/link&gt; @child_property
+<link linkend="child-properties">child property</link> @child_property
on @widget.
This is the analogue of g_object_notify() for child properties.
@@ -26631,7 +27902,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="child_property">
<parameter_description> the name of a child property installed on the
-class of @widget&lt;!-- --&gt;'s parent
+class of @widget<!-- -->'s parent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26677,9 +27948,9 @@
(same major version.)
This function is primarily for GTK+ modules; the module
-can call this function to check that it wasn't loaded
+can call this function to check that it wasn't loaded
into an incompatible version of GTK+. However, such a
-a check isn't completely reliable, since the module may be
+a check isn't completely reliable, since the module may be
linked against an old version of GTK+ and calling the
old version of gtk_check_version(), but still get loaded
into an application using a newer version of GTK+.
@@ -26804,7 +28075,7 @@
Creates a new #GtkAction object. To add the action to a
#GtkActionGroup and set the accelerator for the action,
call gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel().
-See &lt;xref linkend="XML-UI"/&gt; for information on allowed action
+See <xref linkend="XML-UI"/> for information on allowed action
names.
@@ -26948,7 +28219,7 @@
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_ui">
<description>
-Creates a &lt;link linkend="XML-UI"&gt;UI definition&lt;/link&gt; of the merged UI.
+Creates a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> of the merged UI.
</description>
@@ -27043,7 +28314,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkWidget.
+<return> A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -27066,6 +28337,16 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkToolShell">
+<description>
+Dummy structure for accessing instances of #GtkToolShellIface.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_starts_display_line">
<description>
Determines whether @iter is at the start of a display line.
@@ -27145,7 +28426,7 @@
<description>
Checks whether there is a #GdkScreen is associated with
this widget. All toplevel widgets have an associated
-screen, and all widgets added into a heirarchy with a toplevel
+screen, and all widgets added into a hierarchy with a toplevel
window at the top.
@@ -27190,7 +28471,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_region_intersect">
<description>
-Computes the intersection of a @widget's area and @region, returning
+Computes the intersection of a @widget's area and @region, returning
the intersection. The result may be empty, use gdk_region_empty() to
check.
@@ -27202,16 +28483,16 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="region">
<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion, in the same coordinate system as
- widget-&gt;allocation. That is, relative to @widget-&gt;window
+ widget->allocation. That is, relative to @widget->window
for %NO_WINDOW widgets; relative to the parent window
-of @widget-&gt;window for widgets with their own window.
+of @widget->window for widgets with their own window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> A newly allocated region holding the intersection of @widget
and @region. The coordinates of the return value are
-relative to @widget-&gt;window for %NO_WINDOW widgets, and
-relative to the parent window of @widget-&gt;window for
+relative to @widget->window for %NO_WINDOW widgets, and
+relative to the parent window of @widget->window for
widgets with their own window.
</return>
</function>
@@ -27251,45 +28532,32 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_widget_synthesize_crossing">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget">
<description>
-Generate crossing event(s) on widget state (sensitivity) or GTK+ grab change.
-
-The real pointer window is the window that most recently received an enter notify
-event. Windows that don't select for crossing events can't become the real
-poiner window. The real pointer widget that owns the real pointer window. The
-effective pointer window is the same as the real pointer window unless the real
-pointer widget is either insensitive or there is a grab on a widget that is not
-an ancestor of the real pointer widget (in which case the effective pointer
-window should be the root window).
-
-When the effective pointer window is the same as the real poiner window, we
-receive crossing events from the windowing system. When the effective pointer
-window changes to become different from the real pointer window we synthesize
-crossing events, attempting to follow X protocol rules:
+Sets an application-supplied widget to use to display a custom preview
+of the currently selected file. To implement a preview, after setting the
+preview widget, you connect to the ::update-preview
+signal, and call gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename() or
+gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri() on each change. If you can
+display a preview of the new file, update your widget and
+set the preview active using gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active().
+Otherwise, set the preview inactive.
-When the root window becomes the effective pointer window:
-- leave notify on real pointer window, detail Ancestor
-- leave notify on all of its ancestors, detail Virtual
-- enter notify on root window, detail Inferior
+When there is no application-supplied preview widget, or the
+application-supplied preview widget is not active, the file chooser
+may display an internally generated preview of the current file or
+it may display no preview at all.
-When the root window ceases to be the effective pointer window:
-- leave notify on root window, detail Inferior
-- enter notify on all ancestors of real pointer window, detail Virtual
-- enter notify on real pointer window, detail Ancestor
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="from">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget the virtual pointer is leaving.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="to">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget the virtual pointer is moving to.
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mode">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkCrossingMode to place on the synthesized events.
+<parameter name="preview_widget">
+<parameter_description> widget for displaying preview.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27390,7 +28658,7 @@
Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask
into a string parseable by gtk_accelerator_parse().
For example, if you pass in #GDK_q and #GDK_CONTROL_MASK,
-this function returns "&lt;Control&gt;q".
+this function returns "<Control>q".
If you need to display accelerators in the user interface,
see gtk_accelerator_get_label().
@@ -27414,7 +28682,7 @@
<function name="gtk_window_parse_geometry">
<description>
Parses a standard X Window System geometry string - see the
-manual page for X (type 'man X') for details on this.
+manual page for X (type 'man X') for details on this.
gtk_window_parse_geometry() does work on all GTK+ ports
including Win32 but is primarily intended for an X environment.
@@ -27434,12 +28702,12 @@
gtk_widget_show_all() on the contents and gtk_window_set_geometry_hints()
on the window.
|[
-#include &lt;gtk/gtk.h&gt;
+#include <gtk/gtk.h>
static void
fill_with_content (GtkWidget *vbox)
{
-/&ast; fill with content... &ast;/
+ ... fill with content ...
}
int
@@ -27466,10 +28734,10 @@
GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE |
GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC);
-if (argc &gt; 1)
+if (argc > 1)
{
if (!gtk_window_parse_geometry (GTK_WINDOW (window), argv[1]))
-fprintf (stderr, "Failed to parse '%s'\n", argv[1]);
+fprintf (stderr, "Failed to parse '%s'\n", argv[1]);
}
gtk_widget_show_all (window);
@@ -27530,7 +28798,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="tab_label">
<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="menu_label">
@@ -27555,7 +28823,7 @@
<function name="GtkStatusbar">
<description>
-Is emitted whenever a new message is popped off a statusbar's stack.
+Is emitted whenever a new message is popped off a statusbar's stack.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -27829,11 +29097,11 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="menubar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="pack_dir">
-<parameter_description> a new #GtkPackDirection.
+<parameter_description> a new #GtkPackDirection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27844,8 +29112,8 @@
<description>
Starts resizing a window. This function is used if an application
has window resizing controls. When GDK can support it, the resize
-will be done using the standard mechanism for the &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt; or windowing
+will be done using the standard mechanism for the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> or windowing
system. Otherwise, GDK will try to emulate window resizing,
potentially not all that well, depending on the windowing system.
@@ -28091,7 +29359,7 @@
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_filename">
<description>
-Selects a filename. If the file name isn't in the current
+Selects a filename. If the file name isn't in the current
folder of @chooser, then the current folder of @chooser will
be changed to the folder containing @filename.
@@ -28198,12 +29466,12 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="fontname">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a string
+<parameter_description> a font name like "Helvetica 12" or "Times Bold 18"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the font selected in @fsd is now the
- fontname specified. %FALSE otherwise.
+ fontname specified, %FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
@@ -28352,7 +29620,7 @@
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_text">
<description>
-Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
+Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
with text @text. If you want the action item to have markup, use
gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_markup().
@@ -28482,7 +29750,7 @@
<function name="gtk_range_get_upper_stepper_sensitivity">
<description>
Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
-'upper' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
+'upper' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
</description>
@@ -28492,7 +29760,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The upper stepper's sensitivity policy.
+<return> The upper stepper's sensitivity policy.
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -28586,7 +29854,7 @@
<description>
Sets the #GtkCellLayoutDataFunc to use for @cell_layout. This function
is used instead of the standard attributes mapping for setting the
-column value, and should set the value of @cell_layout's cell renderer(s)
+column value, and should set the value of @cell_layout's cell renderer(s)
as appropriate. @func may be %NULL to remove and older one.
Since: 2.4
@@ -28634,7 +29902,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry&lt;!-- --&gt;s
+<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry<!-- -->s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="callback_data">
@@ -28709,7 +29977,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest">
<description>
Turns @tree_view into a drop destination for automatic DND. Calling
-this method sets reorderable to %FALSE.
+this method sets #GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -28769,7 +30037,7 @@
<function name="gtk_frame_get_label_align">
<description>
-Retrieves the X and Y alignment of the frame's label. See
+Retrieves the X and Y alignment of the frame's label. See
gtk_frame_set_label_align().
</description>
@@ -28779,11 +30047,11 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of frame's label, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of frame's label, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of frame's label, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of frame's label, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -28961,7 +30229,7 @@
Note that this function uses the currently-computed height of the
lines in the text buffer. Line heights are computed in an idle
-handler; so this function may not have the desired effect if it's
+handler; so this function may not have the desired effect if it's
called before the height computations. To avoid oddness, consider
using gtk_text_view_scroll_to_mark() which saves a point to be
scrolled to after line validation.
@@ -29003,13 +30271,6 @@
<description>
Creates a new #GtkEntry widget with the given maximum length.
-Note: the existence of this function is inconsistent
-with the rest of the GTK+ API. The normal setup would
-be to just require the user to make an extra call
-to gtk_entry_set_max_length() instead. It is not
-expected that this function will be removed, but
-it would be better practice not to use it.
-
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -29020,7 +30281,9 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkEntry.
+<return> a new #GtkEntry
+
+Deprecated: Use gtk_entry_set_max_length() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -29127,7 +30390,7 @@
<function name="gtk_toolbar_insert_stock">
<description>
Inserts a stock item at the specified position of the toolbar. If
- stock_id is not a known stock item ID, it's inserted verbatim,
+ stock_id is not a known stock item ID, it's inserted verbatim,
except that underscores used to mark mnemonics are removed.
@callback must be a pointer to a function taking a #GtkWidget and a gpointer as
@@ -29228,7 +30491,7 @@
#GtkRecentChooser. A #GtkParamSpecOverride property is installed
for each property, using the values from the #GtkRecentChooserProp
enumeration. The caller must make sure itself that the enumeration
-values don't collide with some other property values they
+values don't collide with some other property values they
are using.
</description>
@@ -29282,6 +30545,8 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_font">
<description>
+Gets the currently-selected font.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -29402,54 +30667,43 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_current_uri">
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_set_use_stock">
<description>
-Gets the URI currently selected by @chooser.
+If %TRUE, the label set in the menuitem is used as a
+stock id to select the stock item for the item.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="image_menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImageMenuItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_stock">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the menuitem should use a stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated string holding a URI.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_current_uri">
<description>
-Sets an application-supplied widget to use to display a custom preview
-of the currently selected file. To implement a preview, after setting the
-preview widget, you connect to the ::update-preview
-signal, and call gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename() or
-gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri() on each change. If you can
-display a preview of the new file, update your widget and
-set the preview active using gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active().
-Otherwise, set the preview inactive.
-
-When there is no application-supplied preview widget, or the
-application-supplied preview widget is not active, the file chooser
-may display an internally generated preview of the current file or
-it may display no preview at all.
+Gets the URI currently selected by @chooser.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="preview_widget">
-<parameter_description> widget for displaying preview.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly allocated string holding a URI.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_row_span_column">
@@ -29484,9 +30738,9 @@
Note that for %NO_WINDOW widgets setting this flag to %FALSE turns
off all allocation on resizing: the widget will not even redraw if
-its position changes; this is to allow containers that don't draw
+its position changes; this is to allow containers that don't draw
anything to avoid excess invalidations. If you set this flag on a
-%NO_WINDOW widget that &lt;emphasis&gt;does&lt;/emphasis&gt; draw on @widget-&gt;window,
+%NO_WINDOW widget that <emphasis>does</emphasis> draw on @widget->window,
you are responsible for invalidating both the old and new allocation
of the widget when the widget is moved and responsible for invalidating
regions newly when the widget increases size.
@@ -29560,7 +30814,7 @@
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_added">
<description>
-Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
+Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
was added to the recently used resources list.
@@ -29571,7 +30825,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
+<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
the resource was added to the list, or -1 on failure.
Since: 2.10
@@ -29637,7 +30891,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="callback">
@@ -29668,7 +30922,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the mark's #GtkTextBuffer
+<return> the mark's #GtkTextBuffer
</return>
</function>
@@ -29676,7 +30930,7 @@
<description>
Set the image of @button to the given widget. Note that
it depends on the #GtkSettings:gtk-button-images setting whether the
-image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call
+image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call
gtk_widget_show() on @image yourself.
Since: 2.6
@@ -29707,7 +30961,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> if %FALSE, the insertion cursor will not be
- shown, even if the text is editable.
+shown, even if the text is editable.
</return>
</function>
@@ -29807,8 +31061,9 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #PangoFontFace representing the selected font group
-details
+<return> A #PangoFontFace representing the selected font
+group details. The returned object is owned by @fontsel and
+must not be modified or freed.
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -29862,7 +31117,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -30023,7 +31278,7 @@
want to prevent insertions at ineditable locations if the insertion
results from a user action (is interactive).
- default_editable indicates the editability of text that doesn't
+ default_editable indicates the editability of text that doesn't
have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the
result of gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
@@ -30086,7 +31341,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an array of #GtkPageRange&lt;!-- --&gt;s. Use g_free()
+<return> an array of #GtkPageRange<!-- -->s. Use g_free()
to free the array when it is no longer needed.
Since: 2.10
@@ -30173,7 +31428,7 @@
<description>
Sets whether a number should be added to the items shown by the
widgets representing @action. The numbers are shown to provide
-a unique character for a mnemonic to be used inside the menu item's
+a unique character for a mnemonic to be used inside the menu item's
label. Only the first ten items get a number to avoid clashes.
Since: 2.12
@@ -30347,7 +31602,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_cursor">
<description>
Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it. This is
-useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular row. If
+useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular row. If
@focus_column is not %NULL, then focus is given to the column specified by
it. Additionally, if @focus_column is specified, and @start_editing is
%TRUE, then editing should be started in the specified cell.
@@ -30380,7 +31635,7 @@
<function name="_gtk_icon_factory_list_ids">
<description>
Gets all known IDs stored in an existing icon factory.
-The strings in the returned list aren't copied.
+The strings in the returned list aren't copied.
The list itself should be freed.
@@ -30460,8 +31715,8 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_translate_coordinates">
<description>
-Translate coordinates relative to @src_widget's allocation to coordinates
-relative to @dest_widget's allocations. In order to perform this
+Translate coordinates relative to @src_widget's allocation to coordinates
+relative to @dest_widget's allocations. In order to perform this
operation, both widgets must be realized, and must share a common
toplevel.
@@ -30519,11 +31774,11 @@
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_filename">
<description>
Sets @filename as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing
-to the file's parent folder and actually selecting the file in list. If
-the @chooser is in #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the file's base name
-will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
+to the file's parent folder and actually selecting the file in list. If
+the @chooser is in #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the file's base name
+will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
-If the file name isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current
+If the file name isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current
folder of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @filename. This
is equivalent to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
gtk_file_chooser_select_filename().
@@ -30531,23 +31786,21 @@
Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
for the directory change.
-If you are implementing a &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt; dialog,
+If you are implementing a <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> dialog,
you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
-does &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt; on it. If you don't have
-a file name already &mdash; for example, if the user just created a new
+does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
+a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
Instead, use something similar to this:
|[
if (document_is_new)
{
-/&ast; the user just created a new document &ast;/
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder (chooser, default_folder_for_saving);
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
}
else
{
-/&ast; the user edited an existing document &ast;/
gtk_file_chooser_set_filename (chooser, existing_filename);
}
]|
@@ -30717,24 +31970,22 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_double">
+<function name="gtk_activatable_reset">
<description>
-Sets @key to a double value.
+This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called internally when
+the #GtkActivatable::related-action property is set or unset and by the implementing
+class when #GtkActivatable::use-action-appearance changes.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> a double value
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the related #GtkAction or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -30756,12 +32007,12 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay associated with @socket_id's
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay associated with @socket_id's
#GtkSocket.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="socket_id">
-<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
+<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -30903,7 +32154,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_set_style">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkStyle for a widget (@widget-&gt;style). You probably don't
+Sets the #GtkStyle for a widget (@widget->style). You probably don't
want to use this function; it interacts badly with themes, because
themes work by replacing the #GtkStyle. Instead, use
gtk_widget_modify_style().
@@ -30927,7 +32178,7 @@
<description>
Creates a list of path of all selected rows. Additionally, if you are
planning on modifying the model after calling this function, you may
-want to convert the returned list into a list of #GtkTreeRowReference&lt;!-- --&gt;s.
+want to convert the returned list into a list of #GtkTreeRowReference<!-- -->s.
To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().
To free the return value, use:
@@ -30992,13 +32243,15 @@
<function name="GtkWindow">
<description>
-The requested opacity of the window. See gtk_window_set_opacity() for
-more details about window opacity.
-
-Since: 2.12
+The ::keys-changed signal gets emitted when the set of accelerators
+or mnemonics that are associated with @window changes.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> the window which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -31096,7 +32349,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the display name for the icon or %NULL, if
-the icon doesn't have a specified display name. This value
+the icon doesn't have a specified display name. This value
is owned @icon_info and must not be modified or free.
Since: 2.4
@@ -31109,7 +32362,7 @@
the buffer. Keep in mind that the child anchor will be
unreferenced when removed from the buffer, so you need to
hold your own reference (with g_object_ref()) if you plan
-to use this function &mdash; otherwise all deleted child anchors
+to use this function — otherwise all deleted child anchors
will also be finalized.
@@ -31130,7 +32383,7 @@
See gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder().
Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
-(e.g. "/home/username/Documents"), which is &lt;emphasis&gt;not the same&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+(e.g. "/home/username/Documents"), which is <emphasis>not the same</emphasis>
as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
#GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_SELECT_FOLDER mode
(e.g. "/home/username/Documents/selected-folder/". To get the
@@ -31259,6 +32512,7 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_set_preview_text">
<description>
+Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
The @text is used to show how the selected font looks.
</description>
@@ -31268,7 +32522,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a string
+<parameter_description> the text to display in the preview area
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -31446,8 +32700,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the accelerator was handled, %FALSE otherwise
- %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
+<return> %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
</return>
</function>
@@ -31533,7 +32786,7 @@
<function name="spin_button_get_shadow_type">
<description>
-Convenience function to Get the shadow type from the underlying widget's
+Convenience function to Get the shadow type from the underlying widget's
style.
@@ -31630,7 +32883,7 @@
<description>
This is equivalent to (gtk_text_iter_begins_tag () ||
gtk_text_iter_ends_tag ()), i.e. it tells you whether a range with
- tag applied to it begins &lt;emphasis&gt;or&lt;/emphasis&gt; ends at @iter.
+ tag applied to it begins <emphasis>or</emphasis> ends at @iter.
</description>
@@ -31677,7 +32930,7 @@
Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
-they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
@@ -31731,6 +32984,32 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_pixbuf">
+<description>
+Retrieves the image used for the icon.
+
+Unlike the other methods of setting and getting icon data, this
+method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a
+#GdkPixbuf, a #GIcon, a stock item, or an icon name.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if no icon is set for this position.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_ref">
<description>
Adds a reference to a widget. This function is exactly the same
@@ -31780,9 +33059,9 @@
<function name="gtk_expander_set_use_markup">
<description>
-Sets whether the text of the label contains markup in &lt;link
-linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango's text markup
-language&lt;/link&gt;. See gtk_label_set_markup().
+Sets whether the text of the label contains markup in <link
+linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango's text markup
+language</link>. See gtk_label_set_markup().
Since: 2.4
@@ -31793,7 +33072,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="use_markup">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the label's text should be parsed for markup
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the label's text should be parsed for markup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -31804,12 +33083,12 @@
<description>
Creates a new vertical scale widget that lets the user input a
number between @min and @max (including @min and @max) with the
-increment @step. @step must be nonzero; it's the distance the
+increment @step. @step must be nonzero; it's the distance the
slider moves when using the arrow keys to adjust the scale value.
-Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if @step
-is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
-needs, use gtk_scale_set_digits() to correct it.
+Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if @step
+is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
+needs, use gtk_scale_set_digits() to correct it.
</description>
@@ -31854,6 +33133,30 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_tooltip_markup">
+<description>
+Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
+position in @entry.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> the icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. Free the returned string
+with g_free() when done.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_unregister_deserialize_format">
<description>
This function unregisters a rich text format that was previously
@@ -31878,9 +33181,9 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_show">
<description>
-Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn't shown will
+Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn't shown will
not appear on the screen. If you want to show all the widgets in a
-container, it's easier to call gtk_widget_show_all() on the
+container, it's easier to call gtk_widget_show_all() on the
container, instead of individually showing the widgets.
Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget,
@@ -32215,7 +33518,7 @@
<description>
Gets the singleton global #GtkAccelMap object. This object
is useful only for notification of changes to the accelerator
-map via the ::changed signal; it isn't a parameter to the
+map via the ::changed signal; it isn't a parameter to the
other accelerator map functions.
@@ -32256,11 +33559,11 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the element's label.
+<parameter_description> the element's label.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
+<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
@@ -32268,7 +33571,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that provides pictorial representation of the element's function.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that provides pictorial representation of the element's function.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="callback">
@@ -32304,7 +33607,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_valist">
<description>
-See gtk_tree_model_get(), this version takes a &lt;type&gt;va_list&lt;/type&gt;
+See gtk_tree_model_get(), this version takes a <type>va_list</type>
for language bindings to use.
</description>
@@ -32318,7 +33621,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="var_args">
-<parameter_description> &lt;type&gt;va_list&lt;/type&gt; of column/return location pairs
+<parameter_description> <type>va_list</type> of column/return location pairs
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -32347,8 +33650,8 @@
<function name="gtk_label_set_markup_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Parses @str which is marked up with the &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text markup language&lt;/link&gt;,
-setting the label's text and attribute list based on the parse results.
+Parses @str which is marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>,
+setting the label's text and attribute list based on the parse results.
If characters in @str are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined
indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.
@@ -32362,7 +33665,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> a markup string (see &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango markup format&lt;/link&gt;)
+<parameter_description> a markup string (see <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -32371,7 +33674,7 @@
<function name="gtk_accel_map_lock_path">
<description>
-Locks the given accelerator path. If the accelerator map doesn't yet contain
+Locks the given accelerator path. If the accelerator map doesn't yet contain
an entry for @accel_path, a new one is created.
Locking an accelerator path prevents its accelerator from being changed
@@ -32476,7 +33779,7 @@
should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key in the overflow menu. For
example, if the label property is "_Open" and @use_underline is %TRUE,
the label on the tool button will be "Open" and the item on the overflow
-menu will have an underlined 'O'.
+menu will have an underlined 'O'.
Labels shown on tool buttons never have mnemonics on them; this property
only affects the menu item on the overflow menu.
@@ -32514,7 +33817,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry&lt;!-- --&gt;s whose @callback members
+<parameter_description> an array of #GtkItemFactoryEntry<!-- -->s whose @callback members
must by of type #GtkItemFactoryCallback1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -32539,7 +33842,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -32583,7 +33886,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -32617,34 +33920,33 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_set_use_underline">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_is_important">
<description>
-If true, an underline in the text of the button label indicates
-the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
+Checks whether @action is important or not
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_underline">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @action is important
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_box_reorder_child">
<description>
Moves @child to a new @position in the list of @box children.
-The list is the &lt;structfield&gt;children&lt;/structfield&gt; field of
+The list is the <structfield>children</structfield> field of
#GtkBox-struct, and contains both widgets packed #GTK_PACK_START
as well as widgets packed #GTK_PACK_END, in the order that these
widgets were added to @box.
-A widget's position in the @box children list determines where
+A widget's position in the @box children list determines where
the widget is packed into @box. A child widget at some position
in the list will be packed just after all other widgets of the
same packing type that appear earlier in the list.
@@ -32782,19 +34084,19 @@
Creates a mark at position @where. If @mark_name is %NULL, the mark
is anonymous; otherwise, the mark can be retrieved by name using
gtk_text_buffer_get_mark(). If a mark has left gravity, and text is
-inserted at the mark's current location, the mark will be moved to
+inserted at the mark's current location, the mark will be moved to
the left of the newly-inserted text. If the mark has right gravity
(@left_gravity = %FALSE), the mark will end up on the right of
newly-inserted text. The standard left-to-right cursor is a mark
with right gravity (when you type, the cursor stays on the right
-side of the text you're typing).
+side of the text you're typing).
-The caller of this function does &lt;emphasis&gt;not&lt;/emphasis&gt; own a
+The caller of this function does <emphasis>not</emphasis> own a
reference to the returned #GtkTextMark, so you can ignore the
return value if you like. Marks are owned by the buffer and go
away when the buffer does.
-Emits the "mark-set" signal as notification of the mark's initial
+Emits the "mark-set" signal as notification of the mark's initial
placement.
@@ -32823,7 +34125,7 @@
<function name="gtk_frame_set_label_align">
<description>
-Sets the alignment of the frame widget's label. The
+Sets the alignment of the frame widget's label. The
default values for a newly created frame are 0.0 and 0.5.
</description>
@@ -32841,7 +34143,7 @@
<parameter name="yalign">
<parameter_description> The y alignment of the label. A value of 0.0 aligns under
the frame; 1.0 aligns above the frame. If the values are exactly
-0.0 or 1.0 the gap in the frame won't be painted because the label
+0.0 or 1.0 the gap in the frame won't be painted because the label
will be completely above or below the frame.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -32901,14 +34203,14 @@
<function name="gtk_window_iconify">
<description>
Asks to iconify (i.e. minimize) the specified @window. Note that
-you shouldn't assume the window is definitely iconified afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;) could deiconify it
+you shouldn't assume the window is definitely iconified afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could deiconify it
again, or there may not be a window manager in which case
-iconification isn't possible, etc. But normally the window will end
-up iconified. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
+iconification isn't possible, etc. But normally the window will end
+up iconified. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
in which case the window will be iconified before it ever appears
onscreen.
@@ -33161,7 +34463,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_path_to_string">
<description>
-Generates a string representation of the path. This string is a ':'
+Generates a string representation of the path. This string is a ':'
separated list of numbers. For example, "4:10:0:3" would be an acceptable return value for this string.
@@ -33180,8 +34482,9 @@
<description>
Changes the default drag icon. GTK+ retains references for the
arguments, and will release them when they are no longer needed.
-This function is obsolete. The default icon should now be changed
-via the stock system by changing the stock pixbuf for #GTK_STOCK_DND.
+
+Deprecated: Change the default drag icon via the stock system by
+changing the stock pixbuf for #GTK_STOCK_DND instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -33209,6 +34512,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkViewport">
+<description>
+Set the scroll adjustments for the viewport. Usually scrolled containers
+like #GtkScrolledWindow will emit this signal to connect two instances
+of #GtkScrollbar to the scroll directions of the #GtkViewport.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="horizontal">
+<parameter_description> the horizontal #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="vertical">
+<parameter_description> the vertical #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_row_inserted">
<description>
Emits the "row-inserted" signal on @tree_model
@@ -33243,7 +34566,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> An integer which is the index of the currently active item,
-or -1 if there's no active item.
+or -1 if there's no active item.
Since: 2.4
</return>
@@ -33302,11 +34625,11 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the element's label.
+<parameter_description> the element's label.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
+<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
@@ -33314,7 +34637,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that provides pictorial representation of the element's function.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that provides pictorial representation of the element's function.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="callback">
@@ -33352,7 +34675,7 @@
<description>
This lets you specify the printing capabilities your application
supports. For instance, if you can handle scaling the output then
-you pass #GTK_PRINT_CAPABILITY_SCALE. If you don't pass that, then
+you pass #GTK_PRINT_CAPABILITY_SCALE. If you don't pass that, then
the dialog will only let you select the scale if the printing
system automatically handles scaling.
@@ -33394,9 +34717,9 @@
one or more of the directories in @path with the same name
as the icon theme. (Themes from multiple of the path elements
are combined to allow themes to be extended by adding icons
-in the user's home directory.)
+in the user's home directory.)
-In addition if an icon found isn't found either in the current
+In addition if an icon found isn't found either in the current
icon theme or the default icon theme, and an image file with
the right name is found directly in one of the elements of
@path, then that image will be used for the icon name.
@@ -33448,7 +34771,7 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_markup_column">
<description>
-Returns: the markup column, or -1 if it's unset.
+Returns: the markup column, or -1 if it's unset.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -33457,7 +34780,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the markup column, or -1 if it's unset.
+<return> the markup column, or -1 if it's unset.
Since: 2.6
</return>
@@ -33642,25 +34965,20 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_enable_tree_lines">
+<function name="gtk_vscrollbar_new">
<description>
-Sets whether to draw lines interconnecting the expanders in @tree_view.
-This does not have any visible effects for lists.
+Creates a new vertical scrollbar.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="enabled">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable tree line drawing, %FALSE otherwise.
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment to use, or %NULL to create a new adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new #GtkVScrollbar
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_documenters">
@@ -33733,15 +35051,15 @@
<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_file">
<description>
-Parses a file containing a &lt;link linkend="BUILDER-UI"&gt;GtkBuilder
-UI definition&lt;/link&gt; building only the requested objects and merges
+Parses a file containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
+UI definition</link> building only the requested objects and merges
them with the current contents of @builder.
-&lt;note&gt;&lt;para&gt;
+<note><para>
If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
#GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @object_ids.
-&lt;/para&gt;&lt;/note&gt;
+</para></note>
</description>
@@ -33820,6 +35138,33 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_from_stock">
+<description>
+Sets the icon shown in the entry at the specified position from
+a stock image.
+
+If @stock_id is %NULL, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> The name of the stock item, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_store_insert">
<description>
Creates a new row at @position. If parent is non-%NULL, then the row will be
@@ -33901,8 +35246,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the accelerator was handled, %FALSE otherwise
- %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
+<return> %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
</return>
</function>
@@ -33924,8 +35268,8 @@
<function name="gtk_list_store_iter_is_valid">
<description>
-&lt;warning&gt;This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
-purposes.&lt;/warning&gt;
+<warning>This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
+purposes.</warning>
Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkListStore.
@@ -33947,6 +35291,28 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_copy_target_list">
+<description>
+This function returns the list of targets this text buffer can
+provide for copying and as DND source. The targets in the list are
+added with %info values from the #GtkTextBufferTargetInfo enum,
+using gtk_target_list_add_rich_text_targets() and
+gtk_target_list_add_text_targets().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GtkTargetList
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_hide_all">
<description>
Recursively hides a widget and any child widgets.
@@ -33996,7 +35362,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_iter_compare">
<description>
A qsort()-style function that returns negative if @lhs is less than
- rhs, positive if @lhs is greater than @rhs, and 0 if they're equal.
+ rhs, positive if @lhs is greater than @rhs, and 0 if they're equal.
Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
is less than the second character in the buffer.
@@ -34064,7 +35430,7 @@
<description>
Obtains an iterator pointing to @char_offset within the given
line. The @char_offset must exist, offsets off the end of the line
-are not allowed. Note &lt;emphasis&gt;characters&lt;/emphasis&gt;, not bytes;
+are not allowed. Note <emphasis>characters</emphasis>, not bytes;
UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.
</description>
@@ -34091,7 +35457,7 @@
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_radio">
<description>
-Return value: %TRUE if we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
+Return value: %TRUE if we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34100,7 +35466,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
+<return> %TRUE if we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
</return>
</function>
@@ -34175,10 +35541,39 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy">
+<description>
+Sets the scrollbar policy for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars.
+
+The policy determines when the scrollbar should appear; it is a value
+from the #GtkPolicyType enumeration. If %GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS, the
+scrollbar is always present; if %GTK_POLICY_NEVER, the scrollbar is
+never present; if %GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC, the scrollbar is present only
+if needed (that is, if the slider part of the bar would be smaller
+than the trough - the display is larger than the page size).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="hscrollbar_policy">
+<parameter_description> policy for horizontal bar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="vscrollbar_policy">
+<parameter_description> policy for vertical bar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_store_insert_before">
<description>
Inserts a new row before @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will
-be appended to @parent 's children. If @parent and @sibling are %NULL, then
+be appended to @parent 's children. If @parent and @sibling are %NULL, then
the row will be appended to the toplevel. If both @sibling and @parent are
set, then @parent must be the parent of @sibling. When @sibling is set,
@parent is optional.
@@ -34266,7 +35661,7 @@
<function name="gtk_scale_button_set_adjustment">
<description>
Sets the #GtkAdjustment to be used as a model
-for the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
+for the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
See gtk_range_set_adjustment() for details.
Since: 2.12
@@ -34294,7 +35689,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> @binding_set to activate
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet set to activate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keyval">
@@ -34483,8 +35878,12 @@
<function name="gtk_editable_delete_text">
<description>
-Deletes the content of the editable between @start_pos and @end_pos.
-Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
+Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
+those characters at positions from @start_pos up to, but not including
+ end_pos If @end_pos is negative, then the the characters deleted
+are those from @start_pos to the end of the text.
+
+Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34507,7 +35906,7 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_cursor">
<description>
Fills in @path and @cell with the current cursor path and cell.
-If the cursor isn't currently set, then * path will be %NULL.
+If the cursor isn't currently set, then * path will be %NULL.
If no cell currently has focus, then * cell will be %NULL.
The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
@@ -34567,8 +35966,9 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_value">
<description>
-Sets initializes and sets @value to that at @column. When done with @value,
-g_value_unset() needs to be called to free any allocated memory.
+Initializes and sets @value to that at @column.
+When done with @value, g_value_unset() needs to be called
+to free any allocated memory.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34657,7 +36057,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom&lt;!-- --&gt;s
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_targets">
@@ -34685,10 +36085,10 @@
response ids passed to this function.
By default, GTK+ dialogs use the button order advocated by the Gnome
-&lt;ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/projects/gup/hig/2.0/"&gt;Human
-Interface Guidelines&lt;/ulink&gt; with the affirmative button at the far
+<ulink url="http://developer.gnome.org/projects/gup/hig/2.0/">Human
+Interface Guidelines</ulink> with the affirmative button at the far
right, and the cancel button left of it. But the builtin GTK+ dialogs
-and #GtkMessageDialog&lt;!-- --&gt;s do provide an alternative button order,
+and #GtkMessageDialog<!-- -->s do provide an alternative button order,
which is more suitable on some platforms, e.g. Windows.
Use this function after adding all the buttons to your dialog, as the
@@ -34724,11 +36124,11 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="first_response_id">
-<parameter_description> a response id used by one @dialog's buttons
+<parameter_description> a response id used by one @dialog's buttons
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> a list of more response ids of @dialog's buttons, terminated by -1
+<parameter_description> a list of more response ids of @dialog's buttons, terminated by -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -34776,7 +36176,7 @@
<function name="gtk_rc_parse_color_full">
<description>
-Parses a color in the &lt;link linkend="color=format"&gt;format&lt;/link&gt; expected
+Parses a color in the <link linkend="color=format">format</link> expected
in a RC file. If @style is not %NULL, it will be consulted to resolve
references to symbolic colors.
@@ -34821,7 +36221,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_cursor_visible">
<description>
Toggles whether the insertion point is displayed. A buffer with no editable
-text probably shouldn't have a visible cursor, so you may want to turn
+text probably shouldn't have a visible cursor, so you may want to turn
the cursor off.
</description>
@@ -34840,7 +36240,7 @@
<function name="gtk_entry_text_index_to_layout_index">
<description>
-Converts from a position in the entry's #PangoLayout (returned by
+Converts from a position in the entry's #PangoLayout (returned by
gtk_entry_get_layout()) to a position in the entry contents
(returned by gtk_entry_get_text()).
@@ -34915,7 +36315,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the menu's title in tearoff mode. This is an internal copy of the
+<return> the menu's title in tearoff mode. This is an internal copy of the
string which must not be freed.
Since: 2.10
@@ -34924,8 +36324,11 @@
<function name="gtk_editable_insert_text">
<description>
-Appends @new_text_length characters of @new_text to the contents of the widget,
-at position @position. Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
+Inserts @new_text_length bytes of @new_text into the contents of the
+widget, at position @position.
+
+Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
+The function updates @position to point after the newly inserted text.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -34938,11 +36341,11 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="new_text_length">
-<parameter_description> the text to append
+<parameter_description> the length of the text in bytes, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> position text will be inserted at
+<parameter_description> location of the position text will be inserted at
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -35025,7 +36428,7 @@
<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon">
<description>
-Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
+Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
had gtk_window_set_icon() called on them from a pixbuf.
Since: 2.4
@@ -35065,7 +36468,7 @@
with the stock_id of the action.
Accel paths are set to
-&lt;literal&gt;&lt;Actions&gt;/&lt;replaceable&gt;group-name&lt;/replaceable&gt;/&lt;replaceable&gt;action-name&lt;/replaceable&gt;&lt;/literal&gt;.
+<literal><Actions>/<replaceable>group-name</replaceable>/<replaceable>action-name</replaceable></literal>.
Since: 2.4
@@ -35122,7 +36525,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkWidget.
+<return> A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -35199,7 +36602,7 @@
<function name="gtk_spin_button_spin">
<description>
-Increment or decrement a spin button's value in a specified direction
+Increment or decrement a spin button's value in a specified direction
by a specified amount.
</description>
@@ -35241,13 +36644,44 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_action">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_markup">
<description>
-Sets action which is performed by the file selector using this entry.
-The #GtkFileChooserEntry will use different completion strategies for
-different actions.
+Sets @tooltip as the contents of the tooltip for the icon at
+the specified position. @tooltip is assumed to be marked up with
+the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
-</description>
+Use %NULL for @tooltip to remove an existing tooltip.
+
+See also gtk_widget_set_tooltip_markup() and
+gtk_enty_set_icon_tooltip_text().
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> the icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for the icon, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="_gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_action">
+<description>
+Sets action which is performed by the file selector using this entry.
+The #GtkFileChooserEntry will use different completion strategies for
+different actions.
+
+</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="chooser_entry">
<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooserEntry
@@ -35280,6 +36714,9 @@
was passed to the #GtkPrintOperation::preview handler together
with @preview.
+A custom iprint preview should use this function in its ::expose
+handler to render the currently selected page.
+
Note that this function requires a suitable cairo context to
be associated with the print context.
@@ -35310,7 +36747,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag source
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag source
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="target_list">
@@ -35616,7 +37053,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to activate window's default widget on Enter keypress
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to activate window's default widget on Enter keypress
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -35638,11 +37075,11 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> place to store a stock icon name
+<parameter_description> place to store a stock icon name, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> place to store a stock icon size
+<parameter_description> place to store a stock icon size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -35728,19 +37165,23 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_append_index">
+<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_set_context_id">
<description>
-Appends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is
-increased.
+Sets the context id for @context.
+
+This causes the currently active slave of @context to be
+replaced by the slave corresponding to the new context id.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="index_">
-<parameter_description> The index.
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> the id to use
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -35792,7 +37233,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -36011,7 +37452,7 @@
<description>
Calls @func on each tag in @table, with user data @data.
Note that the table may not be modified while iterating
-over it (you can't add/remove tags).
+over it (you can't add/remove tags).
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36157,7 +37598,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="points">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint&lt;!-- --&gt;s
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint<!-- -->s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_points">
@@ -36183,7 +37624,7 @@
a tag to a tag table, it will be assigned the highest priority in
the table by default; so normally the precedence of a set of tags
is the order in which they were added to the table, or created with
-gtk_text_buffer_create_tag(), which adds the tag to the buffer's table
+gtk_text_buffer_create_tag(), which adds the tag to the buffer's table
automatically.
</description>
@@ -36338,9 +37779,9 @@
this function.
If @sort_func is %NULL, then there will be no default comparison function.
-This means that once the model has been sorted, it can't go back to the
-default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of @sortable is
-GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, the model will be unsorted.
+This means that once the model has been sorted, it can't go back to the
+default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of @sortable
+is %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, the model will be unsorted.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -36463,7 +37904,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="tab_label">
<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="menu_label">
@@ -36481,28 +37922,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_text_util_create_drag_icon">
-<description>
-Creates a drag and drop icon from @text.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> #GtkWidget to extract the pango context
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> a #gchar to render the icon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="len">
-<parameter_description> length of @text, or -1 for NUL-terminated text
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_fixed_get_has_window">
<description>
Gets whether the #GtkFixed has its own #GdkWindow.
@@ -36664,7 +38083,6 @@
Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
widget or not.
-
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="editable">
@@ -36830,11 +38248,11 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="menubar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="child_pack_dir">
-<parameter_description> a new #GtkPackDirection.
+<parameter_description> a new #GtkPackDirection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -36996,7 +38414,7 @@
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_delete_action">
<description>
-Deletes the action at @index_ from @completion's action list.
+Deletes the action at @index_ from @completion's action list.
Since: 2.4
@@ -37056,7 +38474,7 @@
Converts coordinates on the window identified by @win to buffer
coordinates, storing the result in (@buffer_x,@buffer_y).
-Note that you can't convert coordinates for a nonexisting window (see
+Note that you can't convert coordinates for a nonexisting window (see
gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()).
</description>
@@ -37092,7 +38510,7 @@
<function name="GtkScaleButton">
<description>
The ::popdown signal is a
-&lt;link linkend="keybinding-signals"&gt;keybinding signal&lt;/link&gt;
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
which gets emitted to popdown the scale widget.
The default binding for this signal is Escape.
@@ -37205,7 +38623,9 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> A #PangoFontFamily representing the selected font
-family. Font families are a collection of font faces.
+family. Font families are a collection of font faces. The
+returned object is owned by @fontsel and must not be modified
+or freed.
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -37213,7 +38633,9 @@
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_resolution">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
+Sets the values of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION,
+%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X and
+%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.
Since: 2.10
@@ -37397,9 +38819,8 @@
</parameters>
<return> the previous change palette hook (that was replaced).
-Deprecated: 2.4: This function is deprecated in favor of
-gtk_color_selection_set_change_palette_with_screen_hook(), and does
-not work in multihead environments.
+Deprecated: 2.4: This function does not work in multihead environments.
+Use gtk_color_selection_set_change_palette_with_screen_hook() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -37407,7 +38828,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_set_tooltip_markup">
<description>
Sets @markup as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
-the &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text markup language&lt;/link&gt;.
+the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
This function will take care of setting GtkWidget:has-tooltip to %TRUE
and of the default handler for the GtkWidget::query-tooltip signal.
@@ -37435,7 +38856,7 @@
<description>
Changes the appearance of the sort indicator.
-This &lt;emphasis&gt;does not&lt;/emphasis&gt; actually sort the model. Use
+This <emphasis>does not</emphasis> actually sort the model. Use
gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_column_id() if you want automatic sorting
support. This function is primarily for custom sorting behavior, and should
be used in conjunction with gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column() to do
@@ -37475,13 +38896,31 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> 0 if the printer match, a negative value if @a &lt; @b,
-or a positive value if @a &gt; @b
+<return> 0 if the printer match, a negative value if @a < @b,
+or a positive value if @a > @b
Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_get_label">
+<description>
+Gets the label text of @action.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the label text
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new">
<description>
Creates a new ui manager object.
@@ -37536,8 +38975,9 @@
<function name="gtk_editable_get_position">
<description>
Retrieves the current position of the cursor relative to the start
-of the content of the editable. Note that this position is in characters,
-not in bytes.
+of the content of the editable.
+
+Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
</description>
@@ -37575,9 +39015,9 @@
<function name="gtk_style_set_font">
<description>
Sets the #GdkFont to use for a given style. This is
-meant only as a replacement for direct access to style-&gt;font
+meant only as a replacement for direct access to style->font
and should not be used in new code. New code should
-use style-&gt;font_desc instead.
+use style->font_desc instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37587,7 +39027,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="font">
<parameter_description> a #GdkFont, or %NULL to use the #GdkFont corresponding
-to style-&gt;font_desc.
+to style->font_desc.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -37612,7 +39052,7 @@
<description>
Converts @child_path to a path relative to @filter. That is, @child_path
points to a path in the child model. The rerturned path will point to the
-same row in the filtered model. If @child_path isn't a valid path on the
+same row in the filtered model. If @child_path isn't a valid path on the
child model or points to a row which is not visible in @filter, then %NULL
is returned.
@@ -37698,9 +39138,23 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spin_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkCellRendererSpin.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkCellRendererSpin
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_get_children">
<description>
-Return value: a newly-allocated list of the container's non-internal children.
+Return value: a newly-allocated list of the container's non-internal children.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -37709,7 +39163,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated list of the container's non-internal children.
+<return> a newly-allocated list of the container's non-internal children.
</return>
</function>
@@ -37760,14 +39214,14 @@
<function name="gtk_window_stick">
<description>
Asks to stick @window, which means that it will appear on all user
-desktops. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely
-stuck afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;) could unstick it
+desktops. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely
+stuck afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unstick it
again, and some window managers do not support sticking
-windows. But normally the window will end up stuck. Just don't
+windows. But normally the window will end up stuck. Just don't
write code that crashes if not.
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window.
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window.
You can track stickiness via the "window-state-event" signal
on #GtkWidget.
@@ -38052,7 +39506,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_input_shape_combine_mask">
<description>
-Sets an input shape for this widget's GDK window. This allows for
+Sets an input shape for this widget's GDK window. This allows for
windows which react to mouse click in a nonrectangular region, see
gdk_window_input_shape_combine_mask() for more information.
@@ -38100,7 +39554,7 @@
<function name="gtk_range_set_upper_stepper_sensitivity">
<description>
Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
-'upper' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
+'upper' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
Since: 2.10
@@ -38111,7 +39565,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="sensitivity">
-<parameter_description> the upper stepper's sensitivity policy.
+<parameter_description> the upper stepper's sensitivity policy.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -38127,7 +39581,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom&lt;!-- --&gt;s
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_targets">
@@ -38175,10 +39629,10 @@
Scrolls the tree view such that the top-left corner of the visible
area is @tree_x, @tree_y, where @tree_x and @tree_y are specified
in tree coordinates. The @tree_view must be realized before
-this function is called. If it isn't, you probably want to be
+this function is called. If it isn't, you probably want to be
using gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell().
-If either @tree_x or @tree_y are -1, then that direction isn't scrolled.
+If either @tree_x or @tree_y are -1, then that direction isn't scrolled.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -38198,27 +39652,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_widget_get_aux_info">
-<description>
-Get the #GtkWidgetAuxInfo structure for the widget.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="create">
-<parameter_description> if %TRUE, create the structure if it doesn't exist
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkAuxInfo structure for the widget, or
-%NULL if @create is %FALSE and one doesn't already exist.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_hover_expand">
<description>
Return value: %TRUE if @tree_view is in hover expansion mode
@@ -38304,7 +39737,7 @@
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_markup">
<description>
-Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
+Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
with markup @markup.
Since: 2.4
@@ -38377,7 +39810,7 @@
<function name="gtk_frame_get_label">
<description>
-If the frame's label widget is a #GtkLabel, returns the
+If the frame's label widget is a #GtkLabel, returns the
text in the label widget. (The frame will have a #GtkLabel
for the label widget if a non-%NULL argument was passed
to gtk_frame_new().)
@@ -38436,7 +39869,7 @@
The "interactive" buffer mutation functions, such as
gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive(), automatically call begin/end
-user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's
+user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's
no need to add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a
single call to one of those functions.
@@ -38450,21 +39883,6 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_socket_add_window">
-<description>
- socket: a #GtkSocket
- xid: the native identifier for a window
- need_reparent: whether the socket's plug's window needs to be
-reparented to the socket
-
-Adds a window to a GtkSocket.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget.
@@ -38608,6 +40026,25 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_button_get_image_position">
+<description>
+Gets the position of the image relative to the text
+inside the button.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the position
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_reverse">
<description>
Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE.
@@ -38638,7 +40075,7 @@
The function gdk_pixbuf_get_from_drawable() can be used to convert
the pixmap to a visual independant representation.
-The snapshot area used by this function is the @widget's allocation plus
+The snapshot area used by this function is the @widget's allocation plus
any extra space occupied by additional windows belonging to this widget
(such as the arrows of a spin button).
Thus, the resulting snapshot pixmap is possibly larger than the allocation.
@@ -38648,10 +40085,10 @@
interpreted widget relative. If width or height of @clip_rect are 0 or
negative, the width or height of the resulting pixmap will be shrunken
by the respective amount.
-For instance a @clip_rect &lt;literal&gt;{ +5, +5, -10, -10 }&lt;/literal&gt; will
+For instance a @clip_rect <literal>{ +5, +5, -10, -10 }</literal> will
chop off 5 pixels at each side of the snapshot pixmap.
If non-%NULL, @clip_rect will contain the exact widget-relative snapshot
-coordinates upon return. A @clip_rect of &lt;literal&gt;{ -1, -1, 0, 0 }&lt;/literal&gt;
+coordinates upon return. A @clip_rect of <literal>{ -1, -1, 0, 0 }</literal>
can be used to preserve the auto-grown snapshot area and use @clip_rect
as a pure output parameter.
@@ -38719,7 +40156,7 @@
<description>
Pushes @cmap onto a global stack of colormaps; the topmost
colormap on the stack will be used to create all widgets.
-Remove @cmap with gtk_widget_pop_colormap(). There's little
+Remove @cmap with gtk_widget_pop_colormap(). There's little
reason to use this function.
</description>
@@ -38737,7 +40174,7 @@
This function does the same work as gtk_init_check().
Additionally, it allows you to add your own commandline options,
and it automatically generates nicely formatted
-&lt;option&gt;--help&lt;/option&gt; output. Note that your program will
+<option>--help</option> output. Note that your program will
be terminated after writing out the help output.
@@ -38753,18 +40190,18 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="parameter_string">
<parameter_description> a string which is displayed in
-the first line of &lt;option&gt;--help&lt;/option&gt; output, after
-&lt;literal&gt;&lt;replaceable&gt;programname&lt;/replaceable&gt; [OPTION...]&lt;/literal&gt;
+the first line of <option>--help</option> output, after
+<literal><replaceable>programname</replaceable> [OPTION...]</literal>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of #GOptionEntry&lt;!-- --&gt;s
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of #GOptionEntry<!-- -->s
describing the options of your program
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="translation_domain">
<parameter_description> a translation domain to use for translating
-the &lt;option&gt;--help&lt;/option&gt; output for the options in @entries
+the <option>--help</option> output for the options in @entries
with gettext(), or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -38782,7 +40219,7 @@
<function name="gtk_statusbar_pop">
<description>
-Removes the first message in the #GtkStatusBar's stack
+Removes the first message in the #GtkStatusBar's stack
with the given context id.
Note that this may not change the displayed message, if
@@ -38805,9 +40242,9 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_intersect">
<description>
-Computes the intersection of a @widget's area and @area, storing
+Computes the intersection of a @widget's area and @area, storing
the intersection in @intersection, and returns %TRUE if there was
-an intersection. @intersection may be %NULL if you're only
+an intersection. @intersection may be %NULL if you're only
interested in whether there was an intersection.
@@ -38874,7 +40311,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
<parameter_description> the size to render the icon at. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1
-means render at the size of the source and don't scale.
+means render at the size of the source and don't scale.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
@@ -38890,6 +40327,36 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_from_icon_name">
+<description>
+Sets the icon shown in the entry at the specified position
+from the current icon theme.
+
+If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be displayed
+instead.
+
+If @icon_name is %NULL, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> The position at which to set the icon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> An icon name, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_box_get_homogeneous">
<description>
Return value: %TRUE if the box is homogeneous.
@@ -38933,7 +40400,7 @@
<function name="GtkLinkButton">
<description>
-The 'visited' state of this button. A visited link is drawn in a
+The 'visited' state of this button. A visited link is drawn in a
different color.
Since: 2.14
@@ -38967,7 +40434,7 @@
some of the rendered #GdkPixbuf objects.
Normally you would use gtk_widget_render_icon() instead of
-using #GtkIconSet directly. The one case where you'd use
+using #GtkIconSet directly. The one case where you'd use
#GtkIconSet is to create application-specific icon sets to place in
a #GtkIconFactory.
@@ -38979,6 +40446,27 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_progress_pulse">
+<description>
+Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
+Causes the entry's progress indicator to enter "activity mode,"
+where a block bounces back and forth. Each call to
+gtk_entry_progress_pulse() causes the block to move by a little bit
+(the amount of movement per pulse is determined by
+gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step()).
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_selection_set_filename">
<description>
Sets a default path for the file requestor. If @filename includes a
@@ -39009,15 +40497,15 @@
<function name="gtk_window_get_size">
<description>
Obtains the current size of @window. If @window is not onscreen,
-it returns the size GTK+ will suggest to the &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt; for the initial window
+it returns the size GTK+ will suggest to the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> for the initial window
size (but this is not reliably the same as the size the window
manager will actually select). The size obtained by
gtk_window_get_size() is the last size received in a
#GdkEventConfigure, that is, GTK+ uses its locally-stored size,
rather than querying the X server for the size. As a result, if you
call gtk_window_resize() then immediately call
-gtk_window_get_size(), the size won't have taken effect yet. After
+gtk_window_get_size(), the size won't have taken effect yet. After
the window manager processes the resize request, GTK+ receives
notification that the size has changed via a configure event, and
the size of the window gets updated.
@@ -39029,18 +40517,18 @@
"configure-event" on the window and adjust your size-dependent
state to match the size delivered in the #GdkEventConfigure.
-Note 2: The returned size does &lt;emphasis&gt;not&lt;/emphasis&gt; include the
+Note 2: The returned size does <emphasis>not</emphasis> include the
size of the window manager decorations (aka the window frame or
border). Those are not drawn by GTK+ and GTK+ has no reliable
method of determining their size.
Note 3: If you are getting a window size in order to position
the window onscreen, there may be a better way. The preferred
-way is to simply set the window's semantic type with
+way is to simply set the window's semantic type with
gtk_window_set_type_hint(), which allows the window manager to
e.g. center dialogs. Also, if you set the transient parent of
dialogs with gtk_window_set_transient_for() window managers
-will often center the dialog over its parent window. It's
+will often center the dialog over its parent window. It's
much preferred to let the window manager handle these
things rather than doing it yourself, because all apps will
behave consistently and according to user prefs if the window
@@ -39049,7 +40537,7 @@
application cannot.
In any case, if you insist on application-specified window
-positioning, there's &lt;emphasis&gt;still&lt;/emphasis&gt; a better way than
+positioning, there's <emphasis>still</emphasis> a better way than
doing it yourself - gtk_window_set_position() will frequently
handle the details for you.
@@ -39202,7 +40690,7 @@
running. See gtk_widget_is_composited(). On Windows it should work
always.
-Note that setting a window's opacity after the window has been
+Note that setting a window's opacity after the window has been
shown causes it to flicker once on Windows.
Since: 2.12
@@ -39333,7 +40821,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -39389,6 +40877,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_printer_lpi">
+<description>
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the resolution in lpi (lines per inch)
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_get_current_event">
<description>
Obtains a copy of the event currently being processed by GTK+. For
@@ -39441,7 +40947,7 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_set_new_from_pixbuf">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkIconSet with @pixbuf as the default/fallback
-source image. If you don't add any additional #GtkIconSource to the
+source image. If you don't add any additional #GtkIconSource to the
icon set, all variants of the icon will be created from @pixbuf,
using scaling, pixelation, etc. as required to adjust the icon size
or make the icon look insensitive/prelighted.
@@ -39479,7 +40985,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the menu item for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't
+<return> the menu item for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't
lead to a menu item
</return>
</function>
@@ -39505,7 +41011,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_search_position_func">
<description>
-Sets the function to use when positioning the seach dialog.
+Sets the function to use when positioning the search dialog.
Since: 2.10
@@ -39593,7 +41099,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window">
<description>
-Adds a child at fixed coordinates in one of the text widget's
+Adds a child at fixed coordinates in one of the text widget's
windows. The window must have nonzero size (see
gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()). Note that the child
coordinates are given relative to the #GdkWindow in question, and
@@ -39601,10 +41107,10 @@
placing a child in #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, scrolling is
irrelevant, the child floats above all scrollable areas. But when
placing a child in one of the scrollable windows (border windows or
-text window), you'll need to compute the child's correct position
+text window), you'll need to compute the child's correct position
in buffer coordinates any time scrolling occurs or buffer changes
occur, and then call gtk_text_view_move_child() to update the
-child's position. Unfortunately there's no good way to detect that
+child's position. Unfortunately there's no good way to detect that
scrolling has occurred, using the current API; a possible hack
would be to update all child positions when the scroll adjustments
change or the text buffer changes. See bug 64518 on
@@ -39687,7 +41193,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
+<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
@@ -39705,12 +41211,12 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if the item is the same size as other homogeneous
-item.s
+items.
Since: 2.4
</return>
@@ -39764,13 +41270,13 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_factory_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkIconFactory. An icon factory manages a collection
-of #GtkIconSet&lt;!-- --&gt;s; a #GtkIconSet manages a set of variants of a
+of #GtkIconSet<!-- -->s; a #GtkIconSet manages a set of variants of a
particular icon (i.e. a #GtkIconSet contains variants for different
sizes and widget states). Icons in an icon factory are named by a
stock ID, which is a simple string identifying the icon. Each
-#GtkStyle has a list of #GtkIconFactory&lt;!-- --&gt;s derived from the current
+#GtkStyle has a list of #GtkIconFactory<!-- -->s derived from the current
theme; those icon factories are consulted first when searching for
-an icon. If the theme doesn't set a particular icon, GTK+ looks for
+an icon. If the theme doesn't set a particular icon, GTK+ looks for
the icon in a list of default icon factories, maintained by
gtk_icon_factory_add_default() and
gtk_icon_factory_remove_default(). Applications with icons should
@@ -39806,6 +41312,8 @@
Since: 2.10
+Deprecated: 2.16: Use gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_text() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="status_icon">
@@ -40114,11 +41622,13 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="hscrollbar_policy">
-<parameter_description> location to store the policy for the horizontal scrollbar, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> location to store the policy for the horizontal
+scrollbar, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="vscrollbar_policy">
-<parameter_description> location to store the policy for the horizontal scrollbar, or %NULL.
+<parameter_description> location to store the policy for the vertical
+scrollbar, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40127,7 +41637,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_class_path">
<description>
-Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget's type,
+Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget's type,
never uses a custom name set with gtk_widget_set_name().
@@ -40251,7 +41761,7 @@
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_uri_display">
<description>
-Gets a displayable version of the resource's URI. If the resource
+Gets a displayable version of the resource's URI. If the resource
is local, it returns a local path; if the resource is not local,
it returns the UTF-8 encoded content of gtk_recent_info_get_uri().
@@ -40264,7 +41774,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> a newly allocated UTF-8 string containing the
-resource's URI or %NULL. Use g_free() when done using it.
+resource's URI or %NULL. Use g_free() when done using it.
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -40303,7 +41813,7 @@
widget. gtk_propagate_event() is a bit higher-level, and
gtk_main_do_event() is the highest level.
-All that said, you most likely don't want to use any of these
+All that said, you most likely don't want to use any of these
functions; synthesizing events is rarely needed. Consider asking on
the mailing list for better ways to achieve your goals. For
example, use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() or
@@ -40462,7 +41972,7 @@
<description>
Undoes the effect of
gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this method sets
-reorderable to %FALSE.
+#GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -40554,9 +42064,9 @@
<function name="gtk_action_group_set_translate_func">
<description>
Sets a function to be used for translating the @label and @tooltip of
-#GtkActionGroupEntry&lt;!-- --&gt;s added by gtk_action_group_add_actions().
+#GtkActionGroupEntry<!-- -->s added by gtk_action_group_add_actions().
-If you're using gettext(), it is enough to set the translation domain
+If you're using gettext(), it is enough to set the translation domain
with gtk_action_group_set_translation_domain().
Since: 2.4
@@ -40626,7 +42136,7 @@
each column number followed by the value to be set.
The list is terminated by a -1. For example, to set column 0 with type
%G_TYPE_STRING to "Foo", you would write
-&lt;literal&gt;gtk_tree_store_set (store, iter, 0, "Foo", -1)&lt;/literal&gt;.
+<literal>gtk_tree_store_set (store, iter, 0, "Foo", -1)</literal>.
The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
</description>
@@ -40691,7 +42201,7 @@
<function name="gtk_binding_parse_binding">
<description>
-Deprecated as public API, used only internally.
+Parse a binding entry from a gtkrc file.
</description>
@@ -40702,6 +42212,8 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> expected token upon errors, %G_TOKEN_NONE on success.
+
+Deprecated: 2.12: There should be no need to call this function outside GTK+.
</return>
</function>
@@ -40884,7 +42396,7 @@
at the same depth as @dest_path. i.e., can we drop the data in
@selection_data at that location. @dest_path does not have to
exist; the return value will almost certainly be %FALSE if the
-parent of @dest_path doesn't exist, though.
+parent of @dest_path doesn't exist, though.
</description>
@@ -40915,7 +42427,7 @@
If this function is called on a window with setting of %TRUE, before
it is realized or showed, it will have a "frame" window around
- window-&gt;window, accessible in @window-&gt;frame. Using the signal
+ window->window, accessible in @window->frame. Using the signal
frame_event you can receive all events targeted at the frame.
This function is used by the linux-fb port to implement managed
@@ -41051,14 +42563,36 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_tooltip_text">
+<description>
+Gets the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
+returned string with g_free() when done.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_binding_entry_add_signall">
<description>
-Deprecated.
+Override or install a new key binding for @keyval with @modifiers on
+ binding_set
+
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_binding_entry_add_signal() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> binding set to add a signal to
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to add a signal to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keyval">
@@ -41251,7 +42785,7 @@
<function name="gtk_label_get_selection_bounds">
<description>
Gets the selected range of characters in the label, returning %TRUE
-if there's a selection.
+if there's a selection.
</description>
@@ -41278,7 +42812,7 @@
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE.
The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
-&lt;!-- FIXME link here --&gt;
+<!-- FIXME link here -->
</description>
@@ -41416,7 +42950,7 @@
<description>
Emits the "remove-tag" signal. The default handler for the signal
removes all occurrences of @tag from the given range. @start and
- end don't have to be in order.
+ end don't have to be in order.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -41531,11 +43065,30 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_append_index">
+<description>
+Appends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is
+increased.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="index_">
+<parameter_description> The index.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_set">
<description>
Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon set. Sample stock sizes are
#GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU, #GTK_ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR. Instead of using
-this function, usually it's better to create a #GtkIconFactory, put
+this function, usually it's better to create a #GtkIconFactory, put
your icon sets in the icon factory, add the icon factory to the
list of default factories with gtk_icon_factory_add_default(), and
then use gtk_image_new_from_stock(). This will allow themes to
@@ -41682,6 +43235,23 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_has_tooltip">
+<description>
+Return value: current value of has-tooltip on @status_icon.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> current value of has-tooltip on @status_icon.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
<description>
Sets @filter_iter to point to the row in @filter that corresponds to the
@@ -41720,15 +43290,15 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="hsv">
-<parameter_description> An HSV color selector.
+<parameter_description> An HSV color selector
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> Diameter for the hue ring.
+<parameter_description> Diameter for the hue ring
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="ring_width">
-<parameter_description> Width of the hue ring.
+<parameter_description> Width of the hue ring
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -41774,7 +43344,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="expand">
@@ -42097,7 +43667,7 @@
Determines whether a given keyval and modifier mask constitute
a valid keyboard accelerator. For example, the #GDK_a keyval
plus #GDK_CONTROL_MASK is valid - this is a "Ctrl+a" accelerator.
-But, you can't, for instance, use the #GDK_Control_L keyval
+But, you can't, for instance, use the #GDK_Control_L keyval
as an accelerator.
</description>
@@ -42239,20 +43809,31 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_list">
+<function name="GtkIMContextInfo">
<description>
-Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
-had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them to set up a
-window-specific icon list. This function allows you to set up the
-icon for all windows in your app at once.
-
-See gtk_window_set_icon_list() for more details.
-
+Bookkeeping information about a loadable input method.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a list of #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="context_id">
+<parameter_description> The unique identification string of the input method.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context_name">
+<parameter_description> The human-readable name of the input method.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="domain">
+<parameter_description> Translation domain to be used with dgettext()
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="domain_dirname">
+<parameter_description> Name of locale directory for use with bindtextdomain()
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="default_locales">
+<parameter_description> A colon-separated list of locales where this input method
+should be the default. The asterisk "*" sets the default for all locales.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42298,7 +43879,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_range_interactive">
<description>
Same as gtk_text_buffer_insert_range(), but does nothing if the
-insertion point isn't editable. The @default_editable parameter
+insertion point isn't editable. The @default_editable parameter
indicates whether the text is editable at @iter if no tags
enclosing @iter affect editability. Typically the result of
gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
@@ -42355,9 +43936,9 @@
<function name="gtk_link_button_get_visited">
<description>
-Retrieves the 'visited' state of the URI where the #GtkLinkButton
+Retrieves the 'visited' state of the URI where the #GtkLinkButton
points. The button becomes visited when it is clicked. If the URI
-is changed on the button, the 'visited' state is unset again.
+is changed on the button, the 'visited' state is unset again.
The state may also be changed using gtk_link_button_set_visited().
@@ -42378,7 +43959,7 @@
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_file">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkImage displaying the file @filename. If the file
-isn't found or can't be loaded, the resulting #GtkImage will
+isn't found or can't be loaded, the resulting #GtkImage will
display a "broken image" icon. This function never returns %NULL,
it always returns a valid #GtkImage widget.
@@ -42406,12 +43987,34 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_style_lookup_icon_set">
+<description>
+Looks up @stock_id in the icon factories associated with @style
+and the default icon factory, returning an icon set if found,
+otherwise %NULL.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> icon set of @stock_id
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_deserialize">
<description>
This function deserializes rich text in format @format and inserts
it at @iter.
- format&lt;!-- --&gt;s to be used must be registered using
+ format<!-- -->s to be used must be registered using
gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format() or
gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset() beforehand.
@@ -42478,9 +44081,9 @@
<description>
Obtains the location of the mouse pointer in widget coordinates.
Widget coordinates are a bit odd; for historical reasons, they are
-defined as @widget-&gt;window coordinates for widgets that are not
-#GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets, and are relative to @widget-&gt;allocation.x,
- widget-&gt;allocation.y for widgets that are #GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets.
+defined as @widget->window coordinates for widgets that are not
+#GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets, and are relative to @widget->allocation.x,
+ widget->allocation.y for widgets that are #GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42503,7 +44106,7 @@
<function name="gtk_layout_get_size">
<description>
Gets the size that has been set on the layout, and that determines
-the total extents of the layout's scrollbar area. See
+the total extents of the layout's scrollbar area. See
gtk_layout_set_size ().
</description>
@@ -42527,19 +44130,19 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_realize">
<description>
Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
-widget. For example, @widget-&gt;window will be created when a widget
+widget. For example, @widget->window will be created when a widget
is realized. Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
realized and mapped automatically.
Realizing a widget requires all
-the widget's parent widgets to be realized; calling
-gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget's parents in addition to
+the widget's parent widgets to be realized; calling
+gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget's parents in addition to
@widget itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
when you realize it, bad things will happen.
This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
-isn't very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
+isn't very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
GtkWidget::expose-event. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
@@ -42559,7 +44162,7 @@
<description>
This function is only useful in widget implementations.
Causes a widget to be unrealized (frees all GDK resources
-associated with the widget, such as @widget-&gt;window).
+associated with the widget, such as @widget->window).
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42594,15 +44197,15 @@
Sets the position of a widget. The funny "u" in the name comes from
the "user position" hint specified by the X Window System, and
-exists for legacy reasons. This function doesn't work if a widget
-is inside a container; it's only really useful on #GtkWindow.
+exists for legacy reasons. This function doesn't work if a widget
+is inside a container; it's only really useful on #GtkWindow.
-Don't use this function to center dialogs over the main application
+Don't use this function to center dialogs over the main application
window; most window managers will do the centering on your behalf
-if you call gtk_window_set_transient_for(), and it's really not
+if you call gtk_window_set_transient_for(), and it's really not
possible to get the centering to work correctly in all cases from
application code. But if you insist, use gtk_window_set_position()
-to set #GTK_WIN_POS_CENTER_ON_PARENT, don't do the centering
+to set #GTK_WIN_POS_CENTER_ON_PARENT, don't do the centering
manually.
Note that although @x and @y can be individually unset, the position
@@ -42628,7 +44231,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag_by_name">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer's tag table to
+Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer's tag table to
get a #GtkTextTag, then calls gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag().
</description>
@@ -42657,7 +44260,7 @@
<description>
Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
printf()-style), which is marked up with the
-&lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango text markup language&lt;/link&gt;.
+<link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
@@ -42667,13 +44270,13 @@
may contain special XML characters, you should use g_markup_printf_escaped()
to escape it.
-&lt;informalexample&gt;&lt;programlisting&gt;
+<informalexample><programlisting>
gchar *msg;
msg = g_markup_printf_escaped (message_format, ...);
-gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (message_dialog, "&percnt;s", msg);
+gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (message_dialog, "%s", msg);
g_free (msg);
-&lt;/programlisting&gt;&lt;/informalexample&gt;
+</programlisting></informalexample>
Since: 2.6
@@ -42685,7 +44288,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="message_format">
<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
- &lt;link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat"&gt;Pango markup format&lt;/link&gt;), or %NULL
+ <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>), or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
@@ -42720,7 +44323,7 @@
gtk_widget_modify_style().
Note that "no window" widgets (which have the %GTK_NO_WINDOW flag set)
-draw on their parent container's window and thus may not draw any
+draw on their parent container's window and thus may not draw any
background themselves. This is the case for e.g. #GtkLabel. To modify
the background of such widgets, you have to set the background color
on their parent; if you want to set the background of a rectangular
@@ -42774,7 +44377,7 @@
<function name="gtk_layout_thaw">
<description>
-This is a deprecated function, it doesn't do anything useful.
+This is a deprecated function, it doesn't do anything useful.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42859,7 +44462,7 @@
Any arguments used by GTK+ or GDK are removed from the array and
@argc and @argv are updated accordingly.
-You shouldn't call this function explicitely if you are using
+You shouldn't call this function explicitely if you are using
gtk_init(), or gtk_init_check().
@@ -42882,7 +44485,7 @@
<description>
Sets @color to be the current color in the GtkColorSelection widget.
-This function is deprecated, use gtk_color_selection_get_current_color() instead.
+Deprecated: Use gtk_color_selection_get_current_color() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42903,7 +44506,7 @@
Sets the title string for the menu. The title is displayed when the menu
is shown as a tearoff menu. If @title is %NULL, the menu will see if it is
attached to a parent menu item, and if so it will try to use the same text as
-that menu item's label.
+that menu item's label.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -43042,7 +44645,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_cursor">
<description>
Fills in @path and @focus_column with the current path and focus column. If
-the cursor isn't currently set, then * path will be %NULL. If no column
+the cursor isn't currently set, then * path will be %NULL. If no column
currently has focus, then * focus_column will be %NULL.
The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() when
@@ -43100,7 +44703,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the header image for @page, or %NULL
-if there's no header image for the page.
+if there's no header image for the page.
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -43239,7 +44842,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the buffer's tag table
+<return> the buffer's tag table
</return>
</function>
@@ -43288,7 +44891,7 @@
timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
This function is a little faster than calling
-gtk_clipboard_wait_for_rich_text() since it doesn't need to retrieve
+gtk_clipboard_wait_for_rich_text() since it doesn't need to retrieve
the actual text.
@@ -43365,7 +44968,7 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_face_list">
<description>
This returns the #GtkTreeView which lists all styles available for
-the selected font. For example, 'Regular', 'Bold', etc.
+the selected font. For example, 'Regular', 'Bold', etc.
</description>
@@ -43375,7 +44978,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkWidget.
+<return> A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -43425,6 +45028,26 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_get_use_stock">
+<description>
+Checks whether the label set in the menuitem is used as a
+stock id to select the stock item for the item.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image_menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImageMenuItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the label set in the menuitem is used as a
+stock id to select the stock item for the item
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_printer_get_state_message">
<description>
Return value: the state message of @printer
@@ -43442,15 +45065,33 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_get_stock_id">
+<description>
+Gets the stock id of @action.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the stock id
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_remove">
<description>
Removes @widget from @container. @widget must be inside @container.
Note that @container will own a reference to @widget, and that this
may be the last reference held; so removing a widget from its
container can destroy that widget. If you want to use @widget
-again, you need to add a reference to it while it's not inside
-a container, using g_object_ref(). If you don't want to use @widget
-again it's usually more efficient to simply destroy it directly
+again, you need to add a reference to it while it's not inside
+a container, using g_object_ref(). If you don't want to use @widget
+again it's usually more efficient to simply destroy it directly
using gtk_widget_destroy() since this will remove it from the
container and help break any circular reference count cycles.
@@ -43675,9 +45316,9 @@
<function name="gtk_window_deiconify">
<description>
Asks to deiconify (i.e. unminimize) the specified @window. Note
-that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely deiconified
-afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;) could iconify it
+that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely deiconified
+afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could iconify it
again before your code which assumes deiconification gets to run.
You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal
@@ -43714,14 +45355,14 @@
<description>
If you only plan to have simple (text-only) tooltips on full rows, you
can use this function to have #GtkTreeView handle these automatically
-for you. @column should be set to the column in @tree_view's model
+for you. @column should be set to the column in @tree_view's model
containing the tooltip texts, or -1 to disable this feature.
When enabled, #GtkWidget::has-tooltip will be set to %TRUE and
@tree_view will connect a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip signal handler.
Note that the signal handler sets the text with gtk_tooltip_set_markup(),
-so &amp;, &lt;, etc have to be escaped in the text.
+so &, <, etc have to be escaped in the text.
Since: 2.12
@@ -43732,7 +45373,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> an integer, which is a valid column number for @tree_view's model
+<parameter_description> an integer, which is a valid column number for @tree_view's model
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -43956,7 +45597,7 @@
<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_name">
<description>
-Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
+Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them from a named
themed icon, see gtk_window_set_icon_name().
@@ -43976,7 +45617,7 @@
<description>
Retrieves the list of icons set by gtk_window_set_icon_list().
The list is copied, but the reference count on each
-member won't be incremented.
+member won't be incremented.
</description>
@@ -43986,7 +45627,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> copy of window's icon list
+<return> copy of window's icon list
</return>
</function>
@@ -44081,7 +45722,7 @@
<description>
Creates a list of paths of all selected items. Additionally, if you are
planning on modifying the model after calling this function, you may
-want to convert the returned list into a list of #GtkTreeRowReference&lt;!-- --&gt;s.
+want to convert the returned list into a list of #GtkTreeRowReference<!-- -->s.
To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().
To free the return value, use:
@@ -44164,7 +45805,7 @@
<function name="_gtk_key_hash_lookup_keyval">
<description>
Looks up the best matching entry or entries in the hash table for a
-given keyval/modifiers pair. It's better to use
+given keyval/modifiers pair. It's better to use
_gtk_key_hash_lookup() if you have the original #GdkEventKey
available. The results are sorted so that entries with less
modifiers come before entries with more modifiers.
@@ -44237,7 +45878,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> The selection function's data.
+<parameter_description> The selection function's data.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="destroy">
@@ -44278,7 +45919,7 @@
Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
-they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
@@ -44429,7 +46070,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="cell_renderer">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer we're setting the attributes of
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer we're setting the attributes of
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="Varargs">
@@ -44500,22 +46141,26 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_title">
+<function name="gtk_scale_new">
<description>
-Retrieves the title of the browse dialog used by @button. The returned value
-should not be modified or freed.
+Creates a new #GtkScale.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the scale's orientation.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment which sets the range of the scale, or
+%NULL to create a new adjustment.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a pointer to the browse dialog's title.
+<return> a new #GtkScale
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
@@ -44623,6 +46268,28 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_set_is_important">
+<description>
+Sets whether the action is important, this attribute is used
+primarily by toolbar items to decide whether to show a label
+or not.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_important">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to make the action important
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_set_from_animation">
<description>
Causes the #GtkImage to display the given animation (or display
@@ -44798,6 +46465,47 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_add_mark">
+<description>
+
+Adds a mark at @value.
+
+A mark is indicated visually by drawing a tick mark next to the scale,
+and GTK+ makes it easy for the user to position the scale exactly at the
+marks value.
+
+If @markup is not %NULL, text is shown next to the tick mark.
+
+To remove marks from a scale, use gtk_scale_clear_marks().
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value at which the mark is placed, must be between
+the lower and upper limits of the scales' adjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> where to draw the mark. For a horizontal scale, #GTK_POS_TOP
+is drawn above the scale, anything else below. For a vertical scale,
+#GTK_POS_LEFT is drawn to the left of the scale, anything else to the
+right.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="markup">
+<parameter_description> Text to be shown at the mark, using <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup</link>, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_sentence_start">
<description>
Moves backward to the previous sentence start; if @iter is already at
@@ -44879,7 +46587,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> @popup_data associated with the item factory from
-which @widget was created, or %NULL if @widget wasn't created
+which @widget was created, or %NULL if @widget wasn't created
by an item factory
</return>
</function>
@@ -45078,7 +46786,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mime_type">
-<parameter_description> the format's mime-type
+<parameter_description> the format's mime-type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="function">
@@ -45086,7 +46794,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> %function's user_data
+<parameter_description> %function's user_data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="user_data_destroy">
@@ -45095,7 +46803,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
-format's mime-type.
+format's mime-type.
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -45151,7 +46859,7 @@
#GtkDragDestIface. Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then the user can reorder the
model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
-these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
+these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
the tree view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
@@ -45176,7 +46884,7 @@
<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_previous_alpha">
<description>
-Sets the 'previous' alpha to be @alpha. This function should be called with
+Sets the 'previous' alpha to be @alpha. This function should be called with
some hesitations, as it might seem confusing to have that alpha change.
</description>
@@ -45301,6 +47009,20 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_progress_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkCellRendererProgress.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new cell renderer
+
+Since: 2.6
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_hover_selection">
<description>
Enables of disables the hover selection mode of @tree_view.
@@ -45385,9 +47107,27 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_get_icon_name">
+<description>
+Gets the icon name of @action.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the icon name
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_stock_add_static">
<description>
-Same as gtk_stock_add(), but doesn't copy @items, so
+Same as gtk_stock_add(), but doesn't copy @items, so
@items must persist until application exit.
@@ -45485,8 +47225,7 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_preview_text">
<description>
-The text returned is the preview text used to show how the selected
-font looks.
+Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
</description>
@@ -45496,16 +47235,16 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> pointer to the preview text string. This string
-points to internally allocated storage in the widget and must not
-be freed, modified or stored.
+<return> the text displayed in the preview area.
+This string is owned by the widget and should not be
+modified or freed
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_string">
<description>
-Parses a string containing a &lt;link linkend="XML-UI"&gt;UI definition&lt;/link&gt; and
-merges it with the current contents of @self. An enclosing &lt;ui&gt;
+Parses a string containing a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> and
+merges it with the current contents of @self. An enclosing <ui>
element is added if it is missing.
@@ -45635,7 +47374,7 @@
If characters in @str are preceded by an underscore, they are
underlined. If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use
-'__' (two underscores). The first underlined character represents a
+'__' (two underscores). The first underlined character represents a
keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic. The mnemonic key can be used
to activate another widget, chosen automatically, or explicitly using
gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
@@ -45753,6 +47492,14 @@
a given event. The results are sorted so that entries with less
modifiers come before entries with more modifiers.
+The matches returned by this function can be exact (i.e. keycode, level
+and group all match) or fuzzy (i.e. keycode and level match, but group
+does not). As long there are any exact matches, only exact matches
+are returned. If there are no exact matches, fuzzy matches will be
+returned, as long as they are not shadowing a possible exact match.
+This means that fuzzy matches won't be considered if their keyval is
+present in the current group.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45778,10 +47525,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GSList of all matching entries. If there were exact
-matches, they are returned, otherwise all fuzzy matches are
-returned. (A fuzzy match is a match in keycode and level, but not
-in group.)
+<return> A #GSList of matching entries.
</return>
</function>
@@ -45854,8 +47598,8 @@
<function name="gtk_dialog_set_response_sensitive">
<description>
-Calls &lt;literal&gt;gtk_widget_set_sensitive (widget, @setting)&lt;/literal&gt;
-for each widget in the dialog's action area with the given @response_id.
+Calls <literal>gtk_widget_set_sensitive (widget, @setting)</literal>
+for each widget in the dialog's action area with the given @response_id.
A convenient way to sensitize/desensitize dialog buttons.
</description>
@@ -45918,6 +47662,30 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_activatable_set_use_action_appearance">
+<description>
+Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
+when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
+
+<note><para>#GtkActivatable implementors need to handle the #GtkActivatable:use-action-appearance
+property and call gtk_activatable_reset() to update @activatable if needed.</para></note>
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_appearance">
+<parameter_description> whether to use the actions appearance
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_drag_set_icon_pixbuf">
<description>
Sets @pixbuf as the icon for a given drag.
@@ -45948,9 +47716,9 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_clear_cache">
<description>
This function should almost never be called. It clears the @filter
-of any cached iterators that haven't been reffed with
+of any cached iterators that haven't been reffed with
gtk_tree_model_ref_node(). This might be useful if the child model
-being filtered is static (and doesn't change often) and there has been
+being filtered is static (and doesn't change often) and there has been
a lot of unreffed access to nodes. As a side effect of this function,
all unreffed iters will be invalid.
@@ -45973,14 +47741,14 @@
Custom subclasses of #GtkToolItem should use this function to update
their menu item when the #GtkToolItem changes. That the
- menu_item_id&lt;!-- --&gt;s must match ensures that a #GtkToolItem will not
+ menu_item_id<!-- -->s must match ensures that a #GtkToolItem will not
inadvertently change a menu item that they did not create.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="menu_item_id">
@@ -45989,7 +47757,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> The #GtkMenuItem passed to
-gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item(), if the @menu_item_id&lt;!-- --&gt;s match.
+gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item(), if the @menu_item_id<!-- -->s match.
Since: 2.4
</return>
@@ -46167,7 +47935,7 @@
<description>
Sets the number of pages in the document.
-This &lt;emphasis&gt;must&lt;/emphasis&gt; be set to a positive number
+This <emphasis>must</emphasis> be set to a positive number
before the rendering starts. It may be set in a
#GtkPrintOperation::begin-print signal hander.
@@ -46195,8 +47963,7 @@
<function name="_gtk_binding_reset_parsed">
<description>
-Removing all binding sets that were added by
-gtk_binding_parse_binding()
+Remove all binding sets that were added by gtk_binding_parse_binding().
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -46247,7 +48014,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="line_top">
<parameter_description> location to store the y coordinate of the
-top of the line. (Can by %NULL.)
+top of the line. (Can by %NULL)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46333,19 +48100,17 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_new">
<description>
-The @title is used to set the title of the #GtkFontSelectionDialog
-returned. This #GtkDialog is specifically catered with widgets for
-selecting a font from those installed.
+Creates a new #GtkFontSelectionDialog.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a string
+<parameter_description> the title of the dialog window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkFontSelectionDialog.
+<return> a new #GtkFontSelectionDialog
</return>
</function>
@@ -46374,11 +48139,11 @@
<description>
Looks up a widget by following a path.
The path consists of the names specified in the XML description of the UI.
-separated by '/'. Elements which don't have a name or action attribute in
-the XML (e.g. &lt;popup&gt;) can be addressed by their XML element name
+separated by '/'. Elements which don't have a name or action attribute in
+the XML (e.g. <popup>) can be addressed by their XML element name
(e.g. "popup"). The root element ("/ui") can be omitted in the path.
-Note that the widget found by following a path that ends in a &lt;menu&gt;
+Note that the widget found by following a path that ends in a <menu>
element is the menuitem to which the menu is attached, not the menu itself.
Also note that the widgets constructed by a ui manager are not tied to
@@ -46405,6 +48170,21 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_get_draw_value">
+<description>
+Returns: whether the current value is displayed as a string
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether the current value is displayed as a string
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_layout_pack_start">
<description>
Packs the @cell into the beginning of @cell_layout. If @expand is %FALSE,
@@ -46433,6 +48213,63 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_add_filter">
+<description>
+Adds a filter to the global list of accel path filters.
+
+Accel map entries whose accel path matches one of the filters
+are skipped by gtk_accel_map_foreach().
+
+This function is intended for GTK+ modules that create their own
+menus, but don't want them to be saved into the applications accelerator
+map dump.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter_pattern">
+<parameter_description> a pattern (see #GPatternSpec)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution_x">
+<description>
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the horizontal resolution in dpi
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution_y">
+<description>
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the vertical resolution in dpi
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="GtkBuilderConnectFunc">
<description>
This is the signature of a function used to connect signals. It is used
@@ -46552,7 +48389,7 @@
<description>
Sets a callback called for each file/directory to see whether
it should be included in model. If this function was made
-public, we'd want to include a GDestroyNotify as well.
+public, we'd want to include a GDestroyNotify as well.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -46597,8 +48434,8 @@
<function name="gtk_menu_bar_get_child_pack_direction">
<description>
-Retrieves the current child pack direction of the menubar. See
-gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction().
+Retrieves the current child pack direction of the menubar.
+See gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction().
</description>
@@ -46654,10 +48491,10 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_reset_default_sort_func">
<description>
-This resets the default sort function to be in the 'unsorted' state. That
+This resets the default sort function to be in the 'unsorted' state. That
is, it is in the same order as the child model. It will re-sort the model
to be in the same order as the child model only if the #GtkTreeModelSort
-is in 'unsorted' state.
+is in 'unsorted' state.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -46805,7 +48642,7 @@
<description>
Invalidates the rectangular area of @widget defined by @x, @y,
@width and @height by calling gdk_window_invalidate_rect() on the
-widget's window and all its child windows. Once the main loop
+widget's window and all its child windows. Once the main loop
becomes idle (after the current batch of events has been processed,
roughly), the window will receive expose events for the union of
all regions that have been invalidated.
@@ -46997,7 +48834,7 @@
The border width of a container is the amount of space to leave
around the outside of the container. The only exception to this is
-#GtkWindow; because toplevel windows can't leave space outside,
+#GtkWindow; because toplevel windows can't leave space outside,
they leave the space inside. The border is added on all sides of
the container. To add space to only one side, one approach is to
create a #GtkAlignment widget, call gtk_widget_set_size_request()
@@ -47011,7 +48848,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="border_width">
-<parameter_description> amount of blank space to leave &lt;emphasis&gt;outside&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+<parameter_description> amount of blank space to leave <emphasis>outside</emphasis>
the container. Valid values are in the range 0-65535 pixels.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -47057,7 +48894,7 @@
Creates a row reference based on @path. This reference will keep pointing
to the node pointed to by @path, so long as it exists. It listens to all
signals emitted by @model, and updates its path appropriately. If @path
-isn't a valid path in @model, then %NULL is returned.
+isn't a valid path in @model, then %NULL is returned.
</description>
@@ -47079,9 +48916,9 @@
<description>
This is a convenience function for creating a widget and setting
its properties in one go. For example you might write:
-&lt;literal&gt;gtk_widget_new (GTK_TYPE_LABEL, "label", "Hello World", "xalign",
-0.0, NULL)&lt;/literal&gt; to create a left-aligned label. Equivalent to
-g_object_new(), but returns a widget so you don't have to
+<literal>gtk_widget_new (GTK_TYPE_LABEL, "label", "Hello World", "xalign",
+0.0, NULL)</literal> to create a left-aligned label. Equivalent to
+g_object_new(), but returns a widget so you don't have to
cast the object yourself.
@@ -47107,13 +48944,38 @@
<function name="GtkIconView">
<description>
-The reorderable property specifies if the items can be reordered
-by DND.
+The ::move-cursor signal is a
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
+which gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.
-Since: 2.8
+Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
+g_signal_emit_by_name() if they need to control the cursor
+programmatically.
+
+The default bindings for this signal include
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>Arrow keys which move by individual steps</listitem>
+<listitem>Home/End keys which move to the first/last item</listitem>
+<listitem>PageUp/PageDown which move by "pages"</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+All of these will extend the selection when combined with
+the Shift modifier.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="iconview">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> the granularity of the move, as a #GtkMovementStep
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> the number of @step units to move
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -47136,6 +48998,31 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_gicon">
+<description>
+Retrieves the #GIcon used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
+no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
+stock, pixbuf, or icon name).
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #GIcon, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
+is not a #GIcon
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_editable">
<description>
Sets the default editability of the #GtkTextView. You can override
@@ -47149,7 +49036,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> whether it's editable
+<parameter_description> whether it's editable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -47165,15 +49052,15 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="hsv">
-<parameter_description> An HSV color selector.
+<parameter_description> An HSV color selector
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> Return value for the diameter of the hue ring.
+<parameter_description> Return value for the diameter of the hue ring
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="ring_width">
-<parameter_description> Return value for the width of the hue ring.
+<parameter_description> Return value for the width of the hue ring
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -47182,7 +49069,8 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_view_unset_model_drag_source">
<description>
-Undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_source().
+Undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_source(). Calling this
+method sets #GtkIconView:reorderable to %FALSE.
Since: 2.8
@@ -47357,6 +49245,44 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_rgb_to_hsv">
+<description>
+Converts a color from RGB space to HSV.
+Input values must be in the [0.0, 1.0] range;
+output values will be in the same range.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="r">
+<parameter_description> Red
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="g">
+<parameter_description> Green
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="b">
+<parameter_description> Blue
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="h">
+<parameter_description> Return value for the hue component
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="s">
+<parameter_description> Return value for the saturation component
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="v">
+<parameter_description> Return value for the value component
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toggle_button_get_mode">
<description>
Retrieves whether the button is displayed as a separate indicator
@@ -47430,9 +49356,9 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_grab_focus">
<description>
-Causes @widget to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
+Causes @widget to have the keyboard focus for the #GtkWindow it's
inside. @widget must be a focusable widget, such as a #GtkEntry;
-something like #GtkFrame won't work. (More precisely, it must have the
+something like #GtkFrame won't work. (More precisely, it must have the
%GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set.)
</description>
@@ -47474,7 +49400,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="socket_id">
-<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
+<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -47501,7 +49427,7 @@
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_popup_accessible">
<description>
-Gets the accessible object corresponding to the combo box's popup.
+Gets the accessible object corresponding to the combo box's popup.
This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
applications should have little use for it.
@@ -47514,7 +49440,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the accessible object corresponding to the combo box's popup.
+<return> the accessible object corresponding to the combo box's popup.
Since: 2.6
</return>
@@ -47630,6 +49556,40 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkScale">
+<description>
+Signal which allows you to change how the scale value is displayed.
+Connect a signal handler which returns an allocated string representing
+ value That string will then be used to display the scale's value.
+
+Here's an example signal handler which displays a value 1.0 as
+with "-->1.0<--".
+|[
+static gchar*
+format_value_callback (GtkScale *scale,
+gdouble value)
+{
+return g_strdup_printf ("-->%0.*g<--",
+gtk_scale_get_digits (scale), value);
+}
+]|
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> the object which received the signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value to format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> allocated string representing @value
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_tooltips">
<description>
Retrieves whether tooltips are enabled. See
@@ -47676,7 +49636,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the ruler's orientation.
+<parameter_description> the ruler's orientation.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -47757,7 +49717,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the current @sort_column_id for this column, or -1 if
-this column can't be used for sorting.
+this column can't be used for sorting.
</return>
</function>
@@ -47766,10 +49726,10 @@
Sets a widget as a potential drop destination, and adds default behaviors.
The default behaviors listed in @flags have an effect similar
-to installing default handlers for the widget's drag-and-drop signals
+to installing default handlers for the widget's drag-and-drop signals
(#GtkWidget:drag-motion, #GtkWidget:drag-drop, ...). They all exist
for convenience. When passing #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL for instance it is
-sufficient to connect to the widget's #GtkWidget::drag-data-received
+sufficient to connect to the widget's #GtkWidget::drag-data-received
signal to get primitive, but consistent drag-and-drop support.
Things become more complicated when you try to preview the dragged data,
@@ -47792,7 +49752,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to an array of #GtkTargetEntry&lt;!-- --&gt;s indicating
+<parameter_description> a pointer to an array of #GtkTargetEntry<!-- -->s indicating
the drop types that this @widget will accept. Later you can access the list
with gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list() and gtk_drag_dest_find_target().
</parameter_description>
@@ -47814,8 +49774,8 @@
Creates a tag and adds it to the tag table for @buffer.
Equivalent to calling gtk_text_tag_new() and then adding the
-tag to the buffer's tag table. The returned tag is owned by
-the buffer's tag table, so the ref count will be equal to one.
+tag to the buffer's tag table. The returned tag is owned by
+the buffer's tag table, so the ref count will be equal to one.
If @tag_name is %NULL, the tag is anonymous.
@@ -47849,6 +49809,36 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_style_get_property">
+<description>
+Queries the value of a style property corresponding to a
+widget class is in the given style.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> the #GType of a descendant of #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the style property to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> a #GValue where the value of the property being
+queried will be stored
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_urgency_hint">
<description>
Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment to draw
@@ -48112,6 +50102,18 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkImageMenuItem">
+<description>
+The Accel Group to use for stock accelerator keys
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_column_spacing">
<description>
Return value: the space between columns
@@ -48253,7 +50255,7 @@
the settings for the default screen (if any); if we are creating
a style for a particular screen, we then call it again in a
location where we know the correct settings.
-The reason for this is that gtk_rc_style_create_style() doesn't
+The reason for this is that gtk_rc_style_create_style() doesn't
take the screen for an argument.
</description>
@@ -48399,7 +50401,7 @@
Gets the name of the @buildable object.
#GtkBuilder sets the name based on the the
-&lt;link linkend="BUILDER-UI"&gt;GtkBuilder UI definition&lt;/link&gt;
+<link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder UI definition</link>
used to construct the @buildable.
@@ -48423,11 +50425,11 @@
This function can be used to make widgets participate in the accel
saving/restoring functionality provided by gtk_accel_map_save() and
-gtk_accel_map_load(), even if they haven't been created by an item
+gtk_accel_map_load(), even if they haven't been created by an item
factory.
Deprecated: 2.4: The recommended API for this purpose are the functions
-gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() and gtk_widget_set_accel_path(); don't
+gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() and gtk_widget_set_accel_path(); don't
use gtk_item_factory_add_foreign() in new code, since it is likely to
be removed in the future.
@@ -48553,7 +50555,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_get_sort_column_id">
<description>
Fills in @sort_column_id and @order with the current sort column and the
-order. It returns %TRUE unless the @sort_column_id is
+order. It returns %TRUE unless the @sort_column_id is
%GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID or
%GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID.
@@ -48600,15 +50602,15 @@
<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_string">
<description>
-Parses a string containing a &lt;link linkend="BUILDER-UI"&gt;GtkBuilder
-UI definition&lt;/link&gt; building only the requested objects and merges
+Parses a string containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
+UI definition</link> building only the requested objects and merges
them with the current contents of @builder.
-&lt;note&gt;&lt;para&gt;
+<note><para>
If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
its child (for instance a #GtkTreeView that depends on its
#GtkTreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @object_ids.
-&lt;/para&gt;&lt;/note&gt;
+</para></note>
</description>
@@ -48670,7 +50672,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="current">
-<parameter_description> the member of @action&lt;!-- --&gt;s group which has just been activated
+<parameter_description> the member of @action<!-- -->s group which has just been activated
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -48777,13 +50779,13 @@
Presents a window to the user. This may mean raising the window
in the stacking order, deiconifying it, moving it to the current
desktop, and/or giving it the keyboard focus, possibly dependent
-on the user's platform, window manager, and preferences.
+on the user's platform, window manager, and preferences.
If @window is hidden, this function calls gtk_widget_show()
as well.
This function should be used when the user tries to open a window
-that's already open. Say for example the preferences dialog is
+that's already open. Say for example the preferences dialog is
currently open, and the user chooses Preferences from the menu
a second time; use gtk_window_present() to move the already-open dialog
where the user can see it.
@@ -48855,6 +50857,27 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_get_always_show_image">
+<description>
+Returns: %TRUE if the menu item will always show the image
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image_menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImageMenuItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="always_show">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the menuitem should always show the image
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the menu item will always show the image
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_mount_operation_set_screen">
<description>
Sets the screen to show windows of the #GtkMountOperation on.
@@ -49017,7 +51040,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom&lt;!-- --&gt;s
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_targets">
@@ -49063,7 +51086,7 @@
When setting multiple adjustment properties via their individual
setters, multiple "changed" signals will be emitted. However, since
the emission of the "changed" signal is tied to the emission of the
-"GObject::notify" signals of the changed properties, it's possible
+"GObject::notify" signals of the changed properties, it's possible
to compress the "changed" signals into one by calling
g_object_freeze_notify() and g_object_thaw_notify() around the
calls to the individual setters.
@@ -49095,7 +51118,7 @@
The "activate" signals of the actions are connected to the callbacks and
their accel paths are set to
-&lt;literal&gt;&lt;Actions&gt;/&lt;replaceable&gt;group-name&lt;/replaceable&gt;/&lt;replaceable&gt;action-name&lt;/replaceable&gt;&lt;/literal&gt;.
+<literal><Actions>/<replaceable>group-name</replaceable>/<replaceable>action-name</replaceable></literal>.
Since: 2.4
@@ -49126,7 +51149,7 @@
Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE.
The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
-&lt;!-- FIXME link here --&gt;
+<!-- FIXME link here -->
Since: 2.10
@@ -49144,6 +51167,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_block_activate">
+<description>
+Disable activation signals from the action
+
+This is needed when updating the state of your proxy
+#GtkActivatable widget could result in calling gtk_action_activate(),
+this is a convenience function to avoid recursing in those
+cases (updating toggle state for instance).
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_label_text">
<description>
Retrieves the text of the tab label for the page containing
@@ -49226,7 +51270,7 @@
<description>
If @setting is %TRUE, then destroying the transient parent of @window
will also destroy @window itself. This is useful for dialogs that
-shouldn't persist beyond the lifetime of the main window they're
+shouldn't persist beyond the lifetime of the main window they're
associated with, for example.
</description>
@@ -49245,10 +51289,11 @@
<function name="gtk_editable_get_selection_bounds">
<description>
-Retrieves the selection bound of the editable. @start_pos will be filled
-with the start of the selection and @end_pos with end. If no text was selected
-both will be identical and %FALSE will be returned. Note that positions are
-specified in characters, not bytes.
+Retrieves the selection bound of the editable. start_pos will be filled
+with the start of the selection and @end_pos with end. If no text was
+selected both will be identical and %FALSE will be returned.
+
+Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
</description>
@@ -49258,16 +51303,15 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="start_pos">
-<parameter_description> beginning of selection
+<parameter_description> location to store the starting position, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="end_pos">
-<parameter_description> end of selection
+<parameter_description> location to store the end position, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> %TRUE if an area is selected, %FALSE otherwise
-
</return>
</function>
@@ -49311,7 +51355,7 @@
With the @n_columns and @types parameters, you give an array of column
types for this model (which will be exposed to the parent model/view).
The @func, @data and @destroy parameters are for specifying the modify
-function. The modify function will get called for &lt;emphasis&gt;each&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+function. The modify function will get called for <emphasis>each</emphasis>
data access, the goal of the modify function is to return the data which
should be displayed at the location specified using the parameters of the
modify function.
@@ -49329,7 +51373,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="types">
-<parameter_description> The #GType&lt;!-- --&gt;s of the columns.
+<parameter_description> The #GType<!-- -->s of the columns.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="func">
@@ -49348,12 +51392,31 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_inner_border">
+<description>
+This function returns the entry's #GtkEntry:inner-border property. See
+gtk_entry_set_inner_border() for more information.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the entry's #GtkBorder, or %NULL if none was set.
+
+Since: 2.10
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_stock">
<description>
Creates a #GtkImage displaying a stock icon. Sample stock icon
names are #GTK_STOCK_OPEN, #GTK_STOCK_QUIT. Sample stock sizes
are #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU, #GTK_ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR. If the stock
-icon name isn't known, the image will be empty.
+icon name isn't known, the image will be empty.
You can register your own stock icon names, see
gtk_icon_factory_add_default() and gtk_icon_factory_add().
@@ -49689,8 +51752,8 @@
<description>
Sets whether the completion popup window will appear even if there is
only a single match. You may want to set this to %FALSE if you
-are using &lt;link linkend="GtkEntryCompletion--inline-completion"&gt;inline
-completion&lt;/link&gt;.
+are using <link linkend="GtkEntryCompletion--inline-completion">inline
+completion</link>.
Since: 2.8
@@ -49742,7 +51805,7 @@
tooltips the item returned will be the cursor item. When %TRUE, then any of
@model, @path and @iter which have been provided will be set to point to
that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
-to be relative to @icon_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
+to be relative to @icon_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
</description>
@@ -49891,7 +51954,7 @@
<function name="gtk_file_filter_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkFileFilter with no rules added to it.
-Such a filter doesn't accept any files, so is not
+Such a filter doesn't accept any files, so is not
particularly useful until you add rules with
gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type(), gtk_file_filter_add_pattern(),
or gtk_file_filter_add_custom(). To create a filter
@@ -49993,8 +52056,8 @@
This function is used to initialize a GTK+ test program.
It will in turn call g_test_init() and gtk_init() to properly
-initialize the testing framework and graphical toolkit. It'll
-also set the program's locale to "C" and prevent loading of rc
+initialize the testing framework and graphical toolkit. It'll
+also set the program's locale to "C" and prevent loading of rc
files and Gtk+ modules. This is done to make tets program
environments as deterministic as possible.
@@ -50006,12 +52069,12 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="argcp">
-<parameter_description> Address of the &lt;parameter&gt;argc&lt;/parameter&gt; parameter of the
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of the
main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="argvp">
-<parameter_description> Address of the &lt;parameter&gt;argv&lt;/parameter&gt; parameter of main().
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
Any parameters understood by g_test_init() or gtk_init() are
stripped before return.
</parameter_description>
@@ -50150,7 +52213,7 @@
Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
-they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
@@ -50207,21 +52270,6 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_widget_get_pointer_window">
-<description>
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the pointer window set on the #GdkScreen @widget is attached
-to, or %NULL.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_current_page">
<description>
Return value: the index (starting from 0) of the current
@@ -50327,7 +52375,7 @@
means that the meaning of the returned value varies with window
gravity. See gtk_window_move() for more details.
-If you haven't changed the window gravity, its gravity will be
+If you haven't changed the window gravity, its gravity will be
#GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST. This means that gtk_window_get_position()
gets the position of the top-left corner of the window manager
frame for the window. gtk_window_move() sets the position of this
@@ -50347,12 +52395,12 @@
If a window has gravity #GDK_GRAVITY_STATIC the window manager
frame is not relevant, and thus gtk_window_get_position() will
-always produce accurate results. However you can't use static
+always produce accurate results. However you can't use static
gravity to do things like place a window in a corner of the screen,
because static gravity ignores the window manager decorations.
-If you are saving and restoring your application's window
-positions, you should know that it's impossible for applications to
+If you are saving and restoring your application's window
+positions, you should know that it's impossible for applications to
do this without getting it somewhat wrong because applications do
not have sufficient knowledge of window manager state. The Correct
Mechanism is to support the session management protocol (see the
@@ -50381,7 +52429,7 @@
<function name="gtk_recent_manager_set_screen">
<description>
Sets the screen for a recent manager; the screen is used to
-track the user's currently configured recently used documents
+track the user's currently configured recently used documents
storage.
Since: 2.10
@@ -50500,7 +52548,7 @@
GtkWidget **child;
notebook = gtk_drag_get_source_widget (context);
-child = (void*) selection_data-&gt;data;
+child = (void*) selection_data->data;
process_widget (*child);
gtk_container_remove (GTK_CONTAINER (notebook), *child);
@@ -50571,6 +52619,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_has_tooltip">
+<description>
+Sets the has-tooltip property on @status_icon to @has_tooltip.
+See #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip for more information.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_tooltip">
+<parameter_description> whether or not @status_icon has a tooltip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_is_ancestor">
<description>
Determines whether @widget is somewhere inside @ancestor, possibly with
@@ -50596,11 +52665,11 @@
<function name="gtk_window_unstick">
<description>
Asks to unstick @window, which means that it will appear on only
-one of the user's desktops. Note that you shouldn't assume the
+one of the user's desktops. Note that you shouldn't assume the
window is definitely unstuck afterward, because other entities
-(e.g. the user or &lt;link linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window
-manager&lt;/link&gt;) could stick it again. But normally the window will
-end up stuck. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
+(e.g. the user or <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window
+manager</link>) could stick it again. But normally the window will
+end up stuck. Just don't write code that crashes if not.
You can track stickiness via the "window-state-event" signal
on #GtkWidget.
@@ -50857,7 +52926,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an array of #GdkAtom&lt;!-- --&gt;s representing the registered
+<return> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s representing the registered
formats.
Since: 2.10
@@ -50925,19 +52994,23 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_widget_is_pointer_widget">
+<function name="gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query">
<description>
+Triggers a new tooltip query on @display, in order to update the current
+visible tooltip, or to show/hide the current tooltip. This function is
+useful to call when, for example, the state of the widget changed by a
+key press.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return>%TRUE if the pointer window belongs to @widget.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_set_width_chars">
@@ -50973,7 +53046,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the orientable's new orientation.
+<parameter_description> the orientable's new orientation.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -51033,6 +53106,28 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction">
+<description>
+Causes the entry's progress indicator to "fill in" the given
+fraction of the bar. The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0,
+inclusive.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fraction">
+<parameter_description> fraction of the task that's been completed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_button_get_label">
<description>
Fetches the text from the label of the button, as set by
@@ -51056,7 +53151,11 @@
<function name="gtk_editable_get_chars">
<description>
-Retreives the content of the editable between @start and @end.
+Retrieves a sequence of characters. The characters that are retrieved
+are those characters at positions from @start_pos up to, but not
+including @end_pos. If @end_pos is negative, then the the characters
+retrieved are those characters from @start_pos to the end of the text.
+
Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
@@ -51066,11 +53165,11 @@
<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
+<parameter name="start_pos">
<parameter_description> start of text
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
+<parameter name="end_pos">
<parameter_description> end of text
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -51081,6 +53180,25 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_button_set_use_underline">
+<description>
+If true, an underline in the text of the button label indicates
+the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_underline">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_mark_get_left_gravity">
<description>
Determines whether the mark has left gravity.
@@ -51100,7 +53218,7 @@
<function name="_gtk_size_group_get_child_requisition">
<description>
Retrieve the "child requisition" of the widget, taking account grouping
-of the widget's requisition with other widgets.
+of the widget's requisition with other widgets.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51141,6 +53259,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_set_icon_name">
+<description>
+Sets the icon name on @action
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> the icon name to set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_expander_get_spacing">
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_expander_set_spacing().
@@ -51197,8 +53335,8 @@
the name of a widget, you allow users or theme authors to apply
styles to that specific widget in their gtkrc
file. @path_reversed_p fills in the path in reverse order,
-i.e. starting with @widget's name instead of starting with the name
-of @widget's outermost ancestor.
+i.e. starting with @widget's name instead of starting with the name
+of @widget's outermost ancestor.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51367,7 +53505,7 @@
<description>
Removes all tags in the range between @start and @end. Be careful
with this function; it could remove tags added in code unrelated to
-the code you're currently writing. That is, using this function is
+the code you're currently writing. That is, using this function is
probably a bad idea if you have two or more unrelated code sections
that add tags.
@@ -51426,7 +53564,7 @@
<function name="gtk_action_set_sensitive">
<description>
Sets the ::sensitive property of the action to @sensitive. Note that
-this doesn't necessarily mean effective sensitivity. See
+this doesn't necessarily mean effective sensitivity. See
gtk_action_is_sensitive()
for that.
@@ -51460,7 +53598,7 @@
<function name="gtk_window_set_wmclass">
<description>
-Don't use this function. It sets the X Window System "class" and
+Don't use this function. It sets the X Window System "class" and
"name" hints for a window. According to the ICCCM, you should
always set these to the same value for all windows in an
application, and GTK+ sets them to that value by default, so calling
@@ -51490,7 +53628,7 @@
<function name="gtk_label_set_text_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Sets the label's text from the string @str.
+Sets the label's text from the string @str.
If characters in @str are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined
indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.
The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen
@@ -51526,7 +53664,7 @@
<parameter name="new_order">
<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the new position of each child
to its old position before the re-ordering,
-i.e. @new_order&lt;literal&gt;[newpos] = oldpos&lt;/literal&gt;.
+i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -51550,7 +53688,7 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_preview_text">
<description>
-The @text is used to show how the selected font looks.
+Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -51559,7 +53697,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a string
+<parameter_description> the text to display in the preview area
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -51601,8 +53739,8 @@
each column number followed by a place to store the value being
retrieved. The list is terminated by a -1. For example, to get a
value from column 0 with type %G_TYPE_STRING, you would
-write: &lt;literal&gt;gtk_tree_model_get (model, iter, 0, &amp;place_string_here, -1)&lt;/literal&gt;,
-where &lt;literal&gt;place_string_here&lt;/literal&gt; is a &lt;type&gt;gchar*&lt;/type&gt; to be
+write: <literal>gtk_tree_model_get (model, iter, 0, &place_string_here, -1)</literal>,
+where <literal>place_string_here</literal> is a <type>gchar*</type> to be
filled with the string.
If appropriate, the returned values have to be freed or unreferenced.
@@ -51720,13 +53858,37 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_double">
+<description>
+Sets @key to a double value.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> a double value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size">
<description>
Sets the width of %GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_LEFT or %GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_RIGHT,
or the height of %GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_TOP or %GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_BOTTOM.
Automatically destroys the corresponding window if the size is set
to 0, and creates the window if the size is set to non-zero. This
-function can only be used for the "border windows," it doesn't work
+function can only be used for the "border windows," it doesn't work
with #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_TEXT, or
#GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_PRIVATE.
@@ -51833,11 +53995,36 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new scrolled window.
+
+The two arguments are the scrolled window's adjustments; these will be
+shared with the scrollbars and the child widget to keep the bars in sync
+with the child. Usually you want to pass %NULL for the adjustments, which
+will cause the scrolled window to create them for you.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="hadjustment">
+<parameter_description> horizontal adjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="vadjustment">
+<parameter_description> vertical adjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new scrolled window
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_add_accelerator">
<description>
Installs an accelerator for this @widget in @accel_group that causes
@accel_signal to be emitted if the accelerator is activated.
-The @accel_group needs to be added to the widget's toplevel via
+The @accel_group needs to be added to the widget's toplevel via
gtk_window_add_accel_group(), and the signal must be of type %G_RUN_ACTION.
Accelerators added through this function are not user changeable during
runtime. If you want to support accelerators that can be changed by the
@@ -51876,7 +54063,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_layout_clamp_iter_to_vrange">
<description>
-If the iterator is not fully in the range @top &lt;= y &lt; @bottom,
+If the iterator is not fully in the range @top <= y < @bottom,
then, if possible, move it the minimum distance so that the
iterator in this range.
@@ -51977,12 +54164,14 @@
<function name="gtk_binding_entry_clear">
<description>
-Use of this function is deprecated.
+Clears a binding entry.
+
+Deprecated: 2.12: Use gtk_binding_entry_remove() instead.
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> @binding_set to clear an entry of
+<parameter_description> binding set to clear an entry of
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="keyval">
@@ -52095,17 +54284,19 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spin_new">
+<function name="gtk_scale_get_digits">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellRendererSpin.
+Gets the number of decimal places that are displayed in the value.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkCellRendererSpin
-
-Since: 2.10
+<return> the number of decimal places that are displayed
</return>
</function>
@@ -52126,35 +54317,50 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_draw_layout">
<description>
-Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
-had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them from a file
-on disk. Warns on failure if @err is %NULL.
-
+Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> location of icon file
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="err">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_text">
+<parameter_description> whether to use the text or foreground
+graphics context of @style
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> the layout to draw
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if setting the icon succeeded.
-
-Since: 2.2
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy">
<description>
You do not need to use this function. Creates a row reference based on
@path. This reference will keep pointing to the node pointed to by @path,
-so long as it exists. If @path isn't a valid path in @model, then %NULL is
+so long as it exists. If @path isn't a valid path in @model, then %NULL is
returned. However, unlike references created with
gtk_tree_row_reference_new(), it does not listen to the model for changes.
The creator of the row reference must do this explicitly using
@@ -52167,7 +54373,7 @@
objects like #GtkTreeView already use this mechanism internally,
using them as the proxy object will produce unpredictable results.
Further more, passing the same object as @model and @proxy
-doesn't work for reasons of internal implementation.
+doesn't work for reasons of internal implementation.
This type of row reference is primarily meant by structures that need to
carefully monitor exactly when a row reference updates itself, and is not
@@ -52268,7 +54474,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> a #GtkIconInfo structure containing information
-about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn't found. Free with
+about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn't found. Free with
gtk_icon_info_free()
Since: 2.12
@@ -52299,6 +54505,30 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_tooltip_text">
+<description>
+Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
+position in @entry.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> the icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. Free the returned string
+with g_free() when done.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_ppd_name">
<description>
Gets the PPD name of the #GtkPaperSize, which
@@ -52383,7 +54613,7 @@
When %FALSE is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard
navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling
-gtk_widget_child_focus() on the widget's toplevel.
+gtk_widget_child_focus() on the widget's toplevel.
The default ::keynav-failed handler returns %TRUE for
%GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD and %GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD. For the other
@@ -52426,14 +54656,14 @@
<function name="gtk_window_set_deletable">
<description>
By default, windows have a close button in the window frame. Some
-&lt;link linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window managers&lt;/link&gt; allow GTK+ to
+<link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window managers</link> allow GTK+ to
disable this button. If you set the deletable property to %FALSE
using this function, GTK+ will do its best to convince the window
manager not to show a close button. Depending on the system, this
function may not have any effect when called on a window that is
already visible, so you should call it before calling gtk_window_show().
-On Windows, this function always works, since there's no window manager
+On Windows, this function always works, since there's no window manager
policy involved.
Since: 2.10
@@ -52455,34 +54685,32 @@
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_uri">
<description>
Sets the file referred to by @uri as the current file for the file chooser,
-by changing to the URI's parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
-list. If the @chooser is #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the URI's base
-name will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
+by changing to the URI's parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
+list. If the @chooser is #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the URI's base
+name will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
-If the URI isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current folder
+If the URI isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current folder
of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @uri. This is equivalent
to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except for the
directory change.
-If you are implementing a &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt; dialog,
+If you are implementing a <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> dialog,
you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
-does &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt; on it. If you don't have
-a file name already &mdash; for example, if the user just created a new
+does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
+a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
Instead, use something similar to this:
|[
if (document_is_new)
{
-/&ast; the user just created a new document &ast;/
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri (chooser, default_folder_for_saving);
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
}
else
{
-/&ast; the user edited an existing document &ast;/
gtk_file_chooser_set_uri (chooser, existing_uri);
}
]|
@@ -52506,6 +54734,28 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_get_short_label">
+<description>
+Gets the short label text of @action.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the label text to set
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the short label text.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_expand">
<description>
Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
@@ -52513,7 +54763,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -52557,9 +54807,9 @@
<function name="gtk_test_slider_set_perc">
<description>
-This function will adjust theslider position of all GtkRange
-based widgets, such as scrollbars or scales, it'll also adjust
-spin buttons. The adjustment value of tehse widgets is set to
+This function will adjust the slider position of all GtkRange
+based widgets, such as scrollbars or scales, it'll also adjust
+spin buttons. The adjustment value of these widgets is set to
a value between the lower and upper limits, according to the
@percentage argument.
@@ -52585,7 +54835,7 @@
When handling this signal, use gtk_font_button_get_font_name()
to find out which font was just selected.
-Note that this signal is only emitted when the &lt;emphasis&gt;user&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+Note that this signal is only emitted when the <emphasis>user</emphasis>
changes the font. If you need to react to programmatic font changes
as well, use the notify::font-name signal.
@@ -52651,13 +54901,13 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_cursor">
<description>
Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it. This is
-useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular item.
+useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular item.
If @cell is not %NULL, then focus is given to the cell specified by
it. Additionally, if @start_editing is %TRUE, then editing should be
started in the specified cell.
-This function is often followed by &lt;literal&gt;gtk_widget_grab_focus
-(icon_view)&lt;/literal&gt; in order to give keyboard focus to the widget.
+This function is often followed by <literal>gtk_widget_grab_focus
+(icon_view)</literal> in order to give keyboard focus to the widget.
Please note that editing can only happen when the widget is realized.
Since: 2.8
@@ -52687,7 +54937,7 @@
<function name="gtk_range_get_lower_stepper_sensitivity">
<description>
Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
-'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
+'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
</description>
@@ -52697,7 +54947,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The lower stepper's sensitivity policy.
+<return> The lower stepper's sensitivity policy.
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -52707,8 +54957,8 @@
<description>
Gets a new #GtkPrintSettings object that represents the
current values in the print dialog. Note that this creates a
-&lt;emphasis&gt;new object&lt;/emphasis&gt;, and you need to unref it
-if don't want to keep it.
+<emphasis>new object</emphasis>, and you need to unref it
+if don't want to keep it.
</description>
@@ -52797,7 +55047,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an array of #GdkAtom&lt;!-- --&gt;s representing the registered
+<return> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s representing the registered
formats.
Since: 2.10
@@ -52806,7 +55056,7 @@
<function name="gtk_menu_attach">
<description>
-Adds a new #GtkMenuItem to a (table) menu. The number of 'cells' that
+Adds a new #GtkMenuItem to a (table) menu. The number of 'cells' that
an item will occupy is specified by @left_attach, @right_attach,
@top_attach and @bottom_attach. These each represent the leftmost,
rightmost, uppermost and lower column and row numbers of the table.
@@ -52941,20 +55191,20 @@
you want to set the background to a different color or
draw on it.
-&lt;note&gt;&lt;para&gt;
+<note><para>
There is one unexpected issue for an invisible event box that has its
window below the child. (See gtk_event_box_set_above_child().)
Since the input-only window is not an ancestor window of any windows
that descendent widgets of the event box create, events on these
-windows aren't propagated up by the windowing system, but only by GTK+.
-The practical effect of this is if an event isn't in the event
+windows aren't propagated up by the windowing system, but only by GTK+.
+The practical effect of this is if an event isn't in the event
mask for the descendant window (see gtk_widget_add_events()),
-it won't be received by the event box.
-&lt;/para&gt;&lt;para&gt;
-This problem doesn't occur for visible event boxes, because in
+it won't be received by the event box.
+</para><para>
+This problem doesn't occur for visible event boxes, because in
that case, the event box window is actually the ancestor of the
descendant windows, not just at the same place on the screen.
-&lt;/para&gt;&lt;/note&gt;
+</para></note>
Since: 2.4
@@ -53016,7 +55266,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the separator's orientation.
+<parameter_description> the separator's orientation.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -53070,7 +55320,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom&lt;!-- --&gt;s
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="n_targets">
@@ -53090,7 +55340,7 @@
A #GtkRcPropertyParser for use with gtk_settings_install_property_parser()
or gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser() which parses a
color given either by its name or in the form
-&lt;literal&gt;{ red, green, blue }&lt;/literal&gt; where %red, %green and
+<literal>{ red, green, blue }</literal> where %red, %green and
%blue are integers between 0 and 65535 or floating-point numbers
between 0 and 1.
@@ -53134,20 +55384,20 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_get_default">
+<function name="GtkTreeSortable">
<description>
-Gets a unique instance of #GtkRecentManager, that you can share
-in your application without caring about memory management. The
-returned instance will be freed when you application terminates.
-
+The ::sort-column-changed signal is emitted when the sort column
+or sort order of @sortable is changed. The signal is emitted before
+the contents of @sortable are resorted.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="sortable">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A unique #GtkRecentManager. Do not ref or unref it.
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_dialog_response">
@@ -53173,10 +55423,10 @@
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark">
<description>
-Deletes @mark, so that it's no longer located anywhere in the
+Deletes @mark, so that it's no longer located anywhere in the
buffer. Removes the reference the buffer holds to the mark, so if
-you haven't called g_object_ref() on the mark, it will be freed. Even
-if the mark isn't freed, most operations on @mark become
+you haven't called g_object_ref() on the mark, it will be freed. Even
+if the mark isn't freed, most operations on @mark become
invalid, until it gets added to a buffer again with
gtk_text_buffer_add_mark(). Use gtk_text_mark_get_deleted() to
find out if a mark has been removed from its buffer.
@@ -53243,6 +55493,33 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkIMContext">
+<description>
+The ::delete-surrounding signal is emitted when the input method
+needs to delete all or part of the context surrounding the cursor.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> the object on which the signal is emitted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="offset">
+<parameter_description> the character offset from the cursor position of the text
+to be deleted. A negative value indicates a position before
+the cursor.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_chars">
+<parameter_description> the number of characters to be deleted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the signal was handled.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="_gtk_text_btree_validate_line">
<description>
Revalidate a single line of the btree for the given view, propagate
@@ -53268,7 +55545,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag_by_name">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer's tag table to
+Calls gtk_text_tag_table_lookup() on the buffer's tag table to
get a #GtkTextTag, then calls gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag().
</description>
@@ -53550,11 +55827,29 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_vadjustment">
+<description>
+Sets the #GtkAdjustment for the vertical scrollbar.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="vadjustment">
+<parameter_description> vertical scroll adjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_max_width">
<description>
Sets the maximum width of the @tree_column. If @max_width is -1, then the
maximum width is unset. Note, the column can actually be wider than max
-width if it's the last column in a view. In this case, the column expands to
+width if it's the last column in a view. In this case, the column expands to
fill any extra space.
</description>
@@ -53682,7 +55977,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="socket_id">
-<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
+<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -53736,7 +56031,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset">
<description>
-Moves @iter within a line, to a new &lt;emphasis&gt;character&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+Moves @iter within a line, to a new <emphasis>character</emphasis>
(not byte) offset. The given character offset must be less than or
equal to the number of characters in the line; if equal, @iter
moves to the start of the next line. See
@@ -53751,7 +56046,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="char_on_line">
-<parameter_description> a character offset relative to the start of @iter's current line
+<parameter_description> a character offset relative to the start of @iter's current line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -53762,7 +56057,7 @@
<description>
Creates a new #GtkComboBoxEntry which has a #GtkEntry as child and a list
of strings as popup. You can get the #GtkEntry from a #GtkComboBoxEntry
-using GTK_ENTRY (GTK_BIN (combo_box_entry)-&gt;child). To add and remove
+using GTK_ENTRY (GTK_BIN (combo_box_entry)->child). To add and remove
strings from the list, just modify @model using its data manipulation
API.
@@ -53798,7 +56093,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="fraction">
-<parameter_description> fraction of the task that's been completed
+<parameter_description> fraction of the task that's been completed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -53866,7 +56161,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="path">
<parameter_description> the factory path of the new item factory, a string of the form
-&lt;literal&gt;"&lt;name&gt;"&lt;/literal&gt;
+<literal>"<name>"</literal>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="accel_group">
@@ -53882,7 +56177,7 @@
<function name="GtkPaned">
<description>
The ::cancel-position signal is a
-&lt;link linkend="keybinding-signals"&gt;keybinding signal&lt;/link&gt;
+<link linkend="keybinding-signals">keybinding signal</link>
which gets emitted to cancel moving the position of the handle using key
bindings. The position of the handle will be reset to the value prior to
moving it.
@@ -53939,7 +56234,7 @@
<function name="gtk_link_button_set_uri">
<description>
Sets @uri as the URI where the #GtkLinkButton points. As a side-effect
-this unsets the 'visited' state of the button.
+this unsets the 'visited' state of the button.
Since: 2.10
@@ -54068,7 +56363,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_text">
-<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
+<parameter_description> the element's tooltip.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltip_private_text">
@@ -54522,6 +56817,9 @@
Since: 2.4
+Deprecated 2.16: activatables are now responsible for activating the
+action directly so this doesnt apply anymore.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="action">
@@ -54578,7 +56876,7 @@
<function name="gtk_fixed_set_has_window">
<description>
Sets whether a #GtkFixed widget is created with a separate
-#GdkWindow for @widget-&gt;window or not. (By default, it will be
+#GdkWindow for @widget->window or not. (By default, it will be
created with no separate #GdkWindow). This function must be called
while the #GtkFixed is not realized, for instance, immediately after the
window is created.
@@ -54740,7 +57038,7 @@
timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
This function is a little faster than calling
-gtk_clipboard_wait_for_text() since it doesn't need to retrieve
+gtk_clipboard_wait_for_text() since it doesn't need to retrieve
the actual text.
@@ -54810,7 +57108,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="page_ranges">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GtkPageRange&lt;!-- --&gt;s
+<parameter_description> an array of #GtkPageRange<!-- -->s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="num_ranges">
@@ -54863,7 +57161,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="tab_label">
<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="menu_label">
@@ -54884,12 +57182,12 @@
<function name="gtk_window_fullscreen">
<description>
Asks to place @window in the fullscreen state. Note that you
-shouldn't assume the window is definitely full screen afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;) could unfullscreen it
+shouldn't assume the window is definitely full screen afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could unfullscreen it
again, and not all window managers honor requests to fullscreen
windows. But normally the window will end up fullscreen. Just
-don't write code that crashes if not.
+don't write code that crashes if not.
You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal
on #GtkWidget.
@@ -54939,7 +57237,7 @@
Swaps the value of @first and @second if @second comes before
@first in the buffer. That is, ensures that @first and @second are
in sequence. Most text buffer functions that take a range call this
-automatically on your behalf, so there's no real reason to call it yourself
+automatically on your behalf, so there's no real reason to call it yourself
in those cases. There are some exceptions, such as gtk_text_iter_in_range(),
that expect a pre-sorted range.
@@ -54984,7 +57282,7 @@
<function name="gtk_selection_clear">
<description>
-The default handler for the GtkWidget::selection_clear_event
+The default handler for the #GtkWidget::selection-clear-event
signal.
@@ -55004,7 +57302,7 @@
Since: 2.2
Deprecated: 2.4: Instead of calling this function, chain up from
-your selection_clear_event handler. Calling this function
+your selection-clear-event handler. Calling this function
from any other context is illegal.
</return>
</function>
@@ -55026,7 +57324,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="tab_label">
<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55038,7 +57336,7 @@
<function name="gtk_buildable_parser_finished">
<description>
Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
-&lt;link linkend="BUILDER-UI"&gt;GtkBuilder UI definition&lt;/link&gt;.
+<link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder UI definition</link>.
Note that this will be called once for each time
gtk_builder_add_from_file() or gtk_builder_add_from_string()
is called on a builder.
@@ -55105,8 +57403,8 @@
<function name="gtk_separator_tool_item_set_draw">
<description>
-When @separator_tool_items is drawn as a vertical line, or just blank.
-Setting this #FALSE along with gtk_tool_item_set_expand() is useful
+Whether @item is drawn as a vertical line, or just blank.
+Setting this to %FALSE along with gtk_tool_item_set_expand() is useful
to create an item that forces following items to the end of the toolbar.
Since: 2.4
@@ -55118,7 +57416,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="draw">
-<parameter_description> whether @separator_tool_item is drawn as a vertical line
+<parameter_description> whether @item is drawn as a vertical line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55181,10 +57479,30 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_set_stock_id">
+<description>
+Sets the stock id on @action
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the stock id
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_paste_clipboard">
<description>
Pastes the contents of a clipboard at the insertion point, or at
- override_location (Note: pasting is asynchronous, that is, we'll
+ override_location (Note: pasting is asynchronous, that is, we'll
ask for the paste data and return, and at some point later after
the main loop runs, the paste data will be inserted.)
@@ -55283,7 +57601,7 @@
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_remove_ui">
<description>
-Unmerges the part of @self&lt;!-- --&gt;s content identified by @merge_id.
+Unmerges the part of @self<!-- -->s content identified by @merge_id.
Since: 2.4
@@ -55305,7 +57623,7 @@
<description>
Sets whether the combo box will grab focus when it is clicked with
the mouse. Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places
-like toolbars where you don't want the keyboard focus removed from
+like toolbars where you don't want the keyboard focus removed from
the main area of the application.
Since: 2.6
@@ -55373,7 +57691,7 @@
index is 0. If @n is too big, or @parent has no children, @iter is set
to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned. @parent will remain a valid
node after this function has been called. As a special case, if @parent is
-%NULL, then the @n&lt;!-- --&gt;th root node is set.
+%NULL, then the @n<!-- -->th root node is set.
</description>
@@ -55395,7 +57713,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @parent has an @n&lt;!-- --&gt;th child.
+<return> %TRUE, if @parent has an @n<!-- -->th child.
</return>
</function>
@@ -55426,8 +57744,8 @@
<description>
(Note: this is a special-purpose function intended for the
framebuffer port; see gtk_window_set_has_frame(). It will not
-return the size of the window border drawn by the &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;, which is the normal
+return the size of the window border drawn by the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>, which is the normal
case when using a windowing system. See
gdk_window_get_frame_extents() to get the standard window border
extents.)
@@ -55488,11 +57806,11 @@
This is a convenience function for launching the default application
to show the uri. The uri must be of a form understood by GIO. Typical
examples are
-&lt;simplelist&gt;
-&lt;member&gt;&lt;filename&gt;file:///home/gnome/pict.jpg&lt;/filename&gt;&lt;/member&gt;
-&lt;member&gt;&lt;filename&gt;http://www.gnome.org&lt;/filename&gt;&lt;/member&gt;
-&lt;member&gt;&lt;filename&gt;mailto:me&commat;gnome.org&lt;/filename&gt;&lt;/member&gt;
-&lt;/simplelist&gt;
+<simplelist>
+<member><filename>file:///home/gnome/pict.jpg</filename></member>
+<member><filename>http://www.gnome.org</filename></member>
+<member><filename>mailto:me gnome org</filename></member>
+</simplelist>
Ideally the timestamp is taken from the event triggering
the gtk_show_uri() call. If timestamp is not known you can take
%GDK_CURRENT_TIME.
@@ -55526,6 +57844,27 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_sensitive">
+<description>
+Returns: %TRUE if the icon is sensitive.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the icon is sensitive.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_set_accel_path">
<description>
Sets the accel path for this action. All proxy widgets associated
@@ -55711,7 +58050,7 @@
GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
"Error printing file:\n%s",
-error-&gt;message);
+error->message);
g_signal_connect (error_dialog, "response",
G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_destroy), NULL);
gtk_widget_show (error_dialog);
@@ -55776,15 +58115,53 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_drag_source">
+<description>
+Sets up the icon at the given position so that GTK+ will start a drag
+operation when the user clicks and drags the icon.
+
+To handle the drag operation, you need to connect to the usual
+#GtkWidget::drag-data-get (or possibly #GtkWidget::drag-data-delete)
+signal, and use gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source() in
+your signal handler to find out if the drag was started from
+an icon.
+
+By default, GTK+ uses the icon as the drag icon. You can use the
+#GtkWidget::drag-begin signal to set a different icon. Note that you
+have to use g_signal_connect_after() to ensure that your signal handler
+gets executed after the default handler.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target_list">
+<parameter_description> the targets (data formats) in which the data can be provided
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="actions">
+<parameter_description> a bitmask of the allowed drag actions
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_hscale_new_with_range">
<description>
Creates a new horizontal scale widget that lets the user input a
number between @min and @max (including @min and @max) with the
-increment @step. @step must be nonzero; it's the distance the
+increment @step. @step must be nonzero; it's the distance the
slider moves when using the arrow keys to adjust the scale value.
-Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if @step
-is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
+Note that the way in which the precision is derived works best if @step
+is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
needs, use gtk_scale_set_digits() to correct it.
@@ -55889,7 +58266,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="mime_type">
-<parameter_description> the format's mime-type
+<parameter_description> the format's mime-type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="function">
@@ -55897,7 +58274,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> @function's user_data
+<parameter_description> @function's user_data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="user_data_destroy">
@@ -55906,7 +58283,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
-format's mime-type.
+format's mime-type.
Since: 2.10
</return>
@@ -55914,8 +58291,7 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_preview_text">
<description>
-The text returned is the preview text used to show how the selected
-font looks.
+Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
</description>
@@ -55925,9 +58301,9 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> pointer to the preview text string. This string
-points to internally allocated storage in the widget and must not
-be freed, modified or stored.
+<return> the text displayed in the preview area.
+This string is owned by the widget and should not be
+modified or freed
</return>
</function>
@@ -55976,7 +58352,7 @@
<description>
Sets the #GtkTreeViewColumnFunc to use for the column. This
function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping for
-setting the column value, and should set the value of @tree_column's
+setting the column value, and should set the value of @tree_column's
cell renderer as appropriate. @func may be %NULL to remove an
older one.
@@ -56021,12 +58397,31 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_tooltip_markup">
+<description>
+Gets the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
+returned string with g_free() when done.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_equal">
<description>
Tests whether two iterators are equal, using the fastest possible
mechanism. This function is very fast; you can expect it to perform
better than e.g. getting the character offset for each iterator and
-comparing the offsets yourself. Also, it's a bit faster than
+comparing the offsets yourself. Also, it's a bit faster than
gtk_text_iter_compare().
@@ -56066,7 +58461,7 @@
<function name="gtk_selection_data_set">
<description>
Stores new data into a #GtkSelectionData object. Should
-&lt;emphasis&gt;only&lt;/emphasis&gt; be called from a selection handler callback.
+<emphasis>only</emphasis> be called from a selection handler callback.
Zero-terminates the stored data.
</description>
@@ -56098,8 +58493,8 @@
<function name="gtk_builder_connect_signals">
<description>
This method is a simpler variation of gtk_builder_connect_signals_full().
-It uses #GModule's introspective features (by opening the module %NULL)
-to look at the application's symbol table. From here it tries to match
+It uses #GModule's introspective features (by opening the module %NULL)
+to look at the application's symbol table. From here it tries to match
the signal handler names given in the interface description with
symbols in the application and connects the signals.
@@ -56149,6 +58544,8 @@
<function name="gtk_style_unref">
<description>
+Decrease the reference count of @style.
+
Deprecated: 2.0: use g_object_unref() instead.
</description>
@@ -56282,7 +58679,7 @@
Sets the resize mode for the container.
The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
-will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
+will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
or executed immediately.
</description>
@@ -56355,9 +58752,29 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="GtkLayout">
+<description>
+Set the scroll adjustments for the layout. Usually scrolled containers
+like #GtkScrolledWindow will emit this signal to connect two instances
+of #GtkScrollbar to the scroll directions of the #GtkLayout.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="horizontal">
+<parameter_description> the horizontal #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="vertical">
+<parameter_description> the vertical #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="GtkScrolledWindow">
<description>
-Whether to place scrollbars within the scrolled window's bevel.
+Whether to place scrollbars within the scrolled window's bevel.
Since: 2.12
@@ -56398,7 +58815,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="tooltips">
@@ -56498,7 +58915,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the @colorsel has an opacity control. %FALSE if it does't.
+<return> %TRUE if the @colorsel has an opacity control. %FALSE if it does't.
</return>
</function>
@@ -56596,6 +59013,22 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkComboBoxEntry which has a #GtkEntry as child. After
+construction, you should set a model using gtk_combo_box_set_model() and a
+text column using gtk_combo_box_entry_set_text_column().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> A new #GtkComboBoxEntry.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_draw_insertion_cursor">
<description>
Draws a text caret on @drawable at @location. This is not a style function
@@ -56619,7 +59052,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="location">
-<parameter_description> location where to draw the cursor (@location-&gt;width is ignored)
+<parameter_description> location where to draw the cursor (@location->width is ignored)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="is_primary">
@@ -56651,7 +59084,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="menu_item_id">
@@ -56762,7 +59195,7 @@
<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_previous_color">
<description>
-Sets the 'previous' color to be @color. This function should be called with
+Sets the 'previous' color to be @color. This function should be called with
some hesitations, as it might seem confusing to have that color change.
Calling gtk_color_selection_set_current_color() will also set this color the first
time it is called.
@@ -57121,7 +59554,7 @@
a set of icons that represent "the same" logical concept in different states,
different global text directions, and different sizes.
-So for example a web browser's "Back to Previous Page" icon might
+So for example a web browser's "Back to Previous Page" icon might
point in a different direction in Hebrew and in English; it might
look different when insensitive; and it might change size depending
on toolbar mode (small/large icons). So a single icon set would
@@ -57136,7 +59569,7 @@
If you want to use a different base pixbuf for different icon
variants, you create multiple icon sources, mark which variants
-they'll be used to create, and add them to the icon set with
+they'll be used to create, and add them to the icon set with
gtk_icon_set_add_source().
By default, the icon source has all parameters wildcarded. That is,
@@ -57249,6 +59682,8 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font">
<description>
+Gets the currently-selected font.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -57258,7 +59693,7 @@
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> the #GdkFont from the #GtkFontSelection for the
-currently selected font in the dialog.
+currently selected font in the dialog, or %NULL if no font is selected
Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name() instead.
</return>
@@ -57296,47 +59731,9 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="get_block_cursor">
-<description>
-Checks whether layout should display block cursor at given position.
-For this layout must be in overwrite mode and text at @insert_iter
-must be editable.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLineDisplay
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="insert_iter">
-<parameter_description> iter pointing to the cursor location
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="insert_index">
-<parameter_description> cursor offset in the @display's layout, it may
-be different from @insert_iter's offset in case when preedit
-string is present.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description> location to store cursor position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cursor_at_line_end">
-<parameter_description> whether cursor is at the end of line
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_style_lookup_color">
<description>
-Looks up @color_name in the style's logical color mappings,
+Looks up @color_name in the style's logical color mappings,
filling in @color and returning %TRUE if found, otherwise
returning %FALSE. Do not cache the found mapping, because
it depends on the #GtkStyle and might change when a theme
@@ -57367,7 +59764,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_cursor_on_cell">
<description>
Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it. This is
-useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular row. If
+useful when you want to focus the user's attention on a particular row. If
@focus_column is not %NULL, then focus is given to the column specified by
it. If @focus_column and @focus_cell are not %NULL, and @focus_column
contains 2 or more editable or activatable cells, then focus is given to
@@ -57406,6 +59803,26 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_activatable_get_use_action_appearance">
+<description>
+Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
+and appearance when setting the related action or when
+the action changes appearance.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @activatable uses its actions appearance.
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_get_default_language">
<description>
Return value: the default language as a #PangoLanguage, must not be
@@ -57494,7 +59911,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -57505,28 +59922,28 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="_gtk_im_module_create">
+<function name="gtk_activatable_get_related_action">
<description>
-Create an IM context of a type specified by the string
-ID @context_id.
+Gets the related #GtkAction for @activatable.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context_id">
-<parameter_description> the context ID for the context type to create
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly created input context of or @context_id, or
-if that could not be created, a newly created GtkIMContextSimple.
+<return> the related #GtkAction if one is set.
+
+Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_source">
<description>
Turns @tree_view into a drag source for automatic DND. Calling this
-method sets reorderable to %FALSE.
+method sets #GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -57655,7 +60072,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="var_args">
-<parameter_description> a &lt;type&gt;va_list&lt;/type&gt; of pairs of property names and
+<parameter_description> a <type>va_list</type> of pairs of property names and
locations to return the property values, starting with the location
for @first_property_name.
</parameter_description>
@@ -57728,7 +60145,7 @@
</parameter>
<parameter name="tab_label">
<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -57759,7 +60176,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window">
<description>
-Return value: A #GdkWindow, or %NULL when @tree_view hasn't been realized yet
+Return value: A #GdkWindow, or %NULL when @tree_view hasn't been realized yet
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -57768,13 +60185,13 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkWindow, or %NULL when @tree_view hasn't been realized yet
+<return> A #GdkWindow, or %NULL when @tree_view hasn't been realized yet
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_nth_item">
<description>
-Return value: The @n&lt;!-- --&gt;'th #GtkToolItem on @toolbar, or %NULL if there
+Return value: The @n<!-- -->'th #GtkToolItem on @toolbar, or %NULL if there
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -57787,8 +60204,8 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The @n&lt;!-- --&gt;'th #GtkToolItem on @toolbar, or %NULL if there
-isn't an @n&lt;!-- --&gt;'th item.
+<return> The @n<!-- -->'th #GtkToolItem on @toolbar, or %NULL if there
+isn't an @n<!-- -->'th item.
Since: 2.4
</return>
@@ -57796,7 +60213,7 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_apply_button">
<description>
-Gets the 'Apply' button.
+Obtains a button. The button doesn't have any function.
</description>
@@ -57806,9 +60223,11 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkWidget used in the dialog for the 'Apply' button.
+<return> a #GtkWidget
Since: 2.14
+
+Deprecated: 2.16: Don't use this function.
</return>
</function>
@@ -57901,7 +60320,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> an array of response ids of @dialog's buttons
+<parameter_description> an array of response ids of @dialog's buttons
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -57935,7 +60354,7 @@
function. The bitfield @needed which is passed in provides information
about what sorts of information that the filter function needs;
this allows GTK+ to avoid retrieving expensive information when
-it isn't needed by the filter.
+it isn't needed by the filter.
Since: 2.10
@@ -57987,7 +60406,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_layout_is_valid">
<description>
-Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout's buffer
+Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout's buffer
</description>
@@ -58098,7 +60517,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="children">
-<parameter_description> a list of descendents of @container (they don't
+<parameter_description> a list of descendents of @container (they don't
have to be direct children)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -58109,18 +60528,35 @@
<parameter name="old_focus">
<parameter_description> widget to use for the starting position, or %NULL
to determine this automatically.
-(Note, this argument isn't used for GTK_DIR_TAB_*,
+(Note, this argument isn't used for GTK_DIR_TAB_*,
which is the only @direction we use currently,
so perhaps this argument should be removed)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> a copy of @children, sorted in correct focusing order,
-with children that aren't suitable for focusing in this direction
+with children that aren't suitable for focusing in this direction
removed.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_fraction">
+<description>
+Return value: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_tree_coords">
<description>
Converts bin_window coordinates to coordinates for the
@@ -58156,7 +60592,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_valist">
<description>
-See gtk_tree_store_set(); this version takes a &lt;type&gt;va_list&lt;/type&gt; for
+See gtk_tree_store_set(); this version takes a <type>va_list</type> for
use by language bindings.
@@ -58171,7 +60607,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="var_args">
-<parameter_description> &lt;type&gt;va_list&lt;/type&gt; of column/value pairs
+<parameter_description> <type>va_list</type> of column/value pairs
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -58180,7 +60616,7 @@
<function name="gtk_enumerate_printers">
<description>
-Calls a function for all #GtkPrinter&lt;!-- --&gt;s.
+Calls a function for all #GtkPrinter<!-- -->s.
If @func returns %TRUE, the enumeration is stopped.
Since: 2.10
@@ -58348,7 +60784,7 @@
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_gicon">
<description>
Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
-If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be
+If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be
displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
will be updated appropriately.
@@ -58370,11 +60806,31 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_append_text">
+<description>
+Appends the given text to the contents of the widget.
+
+Deprecated: 2.0: Use gtk_editable_insert_text() instead.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the text to append
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_ancestor">
<description>
Gets the first ancestor of @widget with type @widget_type. For example,
-&lt;literal&gt;gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)&lt;/literal&gt; gets
-the first #GtkBox that's an ancestor of @widget. No reference will be
+<literal>gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)</literal> gets
+the first #GtkBox that's an ancestor of @widget. No reference will be
added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. See note
about checking for a toplevel #GtkWindow in the docs for
gtk_widget_get_toplevel().
@@ -58423,12 +60879,20 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="GtkToolShell">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_hadjustment">
<description>
-Dummy structure for accessing instances of #GtkToolShellIface.
+Sets the #GtkAdjustment for the horizontal scrollbar.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="hadjustment">
+<parameter_description> horizontal scroll adjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -58436,14 +60900,14 @@
<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap">
<description>
Toggles line wrapping within the #GtkLabel widget. %TRUE makes it break
-lines if text exceeds the widget's size. %FALSE lets the text get cut off
+lines if text exceeds the widget's size. %FALSE lets the text get cut off
by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.
Note that setting line wrapping to %TRUE does not make the label
-wrap at its parent container's width, because GTK+ widgets
-conceptually can't make their requisition depend on the parent
-container's size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
-set the label's width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
+wrap at its parent container's width, because GTK+ widgets
+conceptually can't make their requisition depend on the parent
+container's size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
+set the label's width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -58461,9 +60925,9 @@
<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_remove">
<description>
-Remove a tag from the table. This will remove the table's
+Remove a tag from the table. This will remove the table's
reference to the tag, so be careful - the tag will end
-up destroyed if you don't have a reference to it.
+up destroyed if you don't have a reference to it.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -58590,8 +61054,8 @@
Obtains a @tree_model and @path from selection data of target type
%GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW. Normally called from a drag_data_received handler.
This function can only be used if @selection_data originates from the same
-process that's calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
-is being passed around. If you aren't in the same process, then you'll
+process that's calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
+is being passed around. If you aren't in the same process, then you'll
get memory corruption. In the #GtkTreeDragDest drag_data_received handler,
you can assume that selection data of type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW is
in from the current process. The returned path must be freed with
@@ -58696,13 +61160,13 @@
to turn off the buffering. "Double buffered" simply means that
gdk_window_begin_paint_region() and gdk_window_end_paint() are called
automatically around expose events sent to the
-widget. gdk_window_begin_paint() diverts all drawing to a widget's
+widget. gdk_window_begin_paint() diverts all drawing to a widget's
window to an offscreen buffer, and gdk_window_end_paint() draws the
buffer to the screen. The result is that users see the window
-update in one smooth step, and don't see individual graphics
+update in one smooth step, and don't see individual graphics
primitives being rendered.
-In very simple terms, double buffered widgets don't flicker,
+In very simple terms, double buffered widgets don't flicker,
so you would only use this function to turn off double buffering
if you had special needs and really knew what you were doing.
@@ -58727,7 +61191,7 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_text_column">
<description>
-Returns: the text column, or -1 if it's unset.
+Returns: the text column, or -1 if it's unset.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -58736,7 +61200,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text column, or -1 if it's unset.
+<return> the text column, or -1 if it's unset.
Since: 2.6
</return>
@@ -58795,7 +61259,7 @@
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_modified">
<description>
-Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
+Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
was last modified.
@@ -58806,7 +61270,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
+<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
the resource was last modified, or -1 on failure.
Since: 2.10
@@ -58831,7 +61295,7 @@
<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_child_detached">
<description>
-Whether the handlebox's child is currently detached.
+Whether the handlebox's child is currently detached.
</description>
@@ -58882,12 +61346,11 @@
<description>
Whether @widget can rely on having its alpha channel
drawn correctly. On X11 this function returns whether a
-compositing manager is running for @widget's screen.
+compositing manager is running for @widget's screen.
Please note that the semantics of this call will change
in the future if used on a widget that has a composited
-window in its heirarchy (as set by
-gdk_window_set_composited()).
+window in its hierarchy (as set by gdk_window_set_composited()).
</description>
@@ -58927,7 +61390,7 @@
A #GtkRcPropertyParser for use with gtk_settings_install_property_parser()
or gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser() which parses
borders in the form
-&lt;literal&gt;"{ left, right, top, bottom }"&lt;/literal&gt; for integers
+<literal>"{ left, right, top, bottom }"</literal> for integers
%left, %right, %top and %bottom.
@@ -59274,11 +61737,11 @@
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_file">
<description>
Sets @file as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing
-to the file's parent folder and actually selecting the file in list. If
-the @chooser is in #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the file's base name
-will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
+to the file's parent folder and actually selecting the file in list. If
+the @chooser is in #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the file's base name
+will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
-If the file name isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current
+If the file name isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current
folder of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @filename. This
is equivalent to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
gtk_file_chooser_select_filename().
@@ -59286,23 +61749,21 @@
Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
for the directory change.
-If you are implementing a &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt; dialog,
+If you are implementing a <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> dialog,
you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
-does &lt;guimenuitem&gt;File/Save As...&lt;/guimenuitem&gt; on it. If you don't have
-a file name already &mdash; for example, if the user just created a new
+does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
+a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
Instead, use something similar to this:
|[
if (document_is_new)
{
-/&ast; the user just created a new document &ast;/
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_file (chooser, default_file_for_saving);
gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
}
else
{
-/&ast; the user edited an existing document &ast;/
gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_file);
}
]|
@@ -59595,10 +62056,11 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_set_font_name">
<description>
-Sets the currently-selected font. Note that the @fontsel needs to know the
-screen in which it will appear for this to work; this can be guaranteed by
-simply making sure that the @fontsel is inserted in a toplevel window before
-you call this function.
+Sets the currently-selected font.
+
+Note that the @fontsel needs to know the screen in which it will appear
+for this to work; this can be guaranteed by simply making sure that the
+ fontsel is inserted in a toplevel window before you call this function.
</description>
@@ -59612,8 +62074,9 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> #TRUE if the font could be set successfully; #FALSE if no such
-font exists or if the @fontsel doesn't belong to a particular screen yet.
+<return> %TRUE if the font could be set successfully; %FALSE if no
+such font exists or if the @fontsel doesn't belong to a particular
+screen yet.
</return>
</function>
@@ -59637,11 +62100,13 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_font_name">
<description>
-Gets the currently-selected font name. Note that this can be a different
-string than what you set with gtk_font_selection_set_font_name(), as
-the font selection widget may normalize font names and thus return a string
-with a different structure. For example, "Helvetica Italic Bold 12" could be
-normalized to "Helvetica Bold Italic 12". Use pango_font_description_equal()
+Gets the currently-selected font name.
+
+Note that this can be a different string than what you set with
+gtk_font_selection_set_font_name(), as the font selection widget may
+normalize font names and thus return a string with a different structure.
+For example, "Helvetica Italic Bold 12" could be normalized to
+"Helvetica Bold Italic 12". Use pango_font_description_equal()
if you want to compare two font descriptions.
@@ -59652,18 +62117,27 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A string with the name of the current font, or #NULL if no font
-is selected. You must free this string with g_free().
+<return> A string with the name of the current font, or %NULL if
+no font is selected. You must free this string with g_free().
</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column_id">
<description>
-Sets the current sort column to be @sort_column_id. The @sortable will
+Sets the current sort column to be @sort_column_id. The @sortable will
resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
-GtkTreeSortable::sort_column_changed signal. If @sort_column_id is
-%GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID, then the default sort function
-will be used, if it is set.
+#GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal. @sortable may either be
+a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>%GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID</term>
+<listitem>the default sort function will be used, if it is set</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+<varlistentry>
+<term>%GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID</term>
+<listitem>no sorting will occur</listitem>
+</varlistentry>
+</variablelist>
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -59710,8 +62184,8 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_child_focus">
<description>
-This function is used by custom widget implementations; if you're
-writing an app, you'd use gtk_widget_grab_focus() to move the focus
+This function is used by custom widget implementations; if you're
+writing an app, you'd use gtk_widget_grab_focus() to move the focus
to a particular widget, and gtk_container_set_focus_chain() to
change the focus tab order. So you may want to investigate those
functions instead.
@@ -59728,13 +62202,13 @@
that widget, and %FALSE if moving in @direction moved the focus
outside the widget. If returning %TRUE, widgets normally
call gtk_widget_grab_focus() to place the focus accordingly;
-if returning %FALSE, they don't modify the current focus location.
+if returning %FALSE, they don't modify the current focus location.
This function replaces gtk_container_focus() from GTK+ 1.2.
It was necessary to check that the child was visible, sensitive,
and focusable before calling gtk_container_focus().
gtk_widget_child_focus() returns %FALSE if the widget is not
-currently in a focusable state, so there's no need for those checks.
+currently in a focusable state, so there's no need for those checks.
</description>
@@ -59755,7 +62229,7 @@
<function name="_gtk_size_group_compute_requisition">
<description>
Compute the requisition of a widget taking into account grouping of
-the widget's requisition with other widgets.
+the widget's requisition with other widgets.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -59900,7 +62374,7 @@
<function name="gtk_init_check">
<description>
This function does the same work as gtk_init() with only
-a single change: It does not terminate the program if the GUI can't be
+a single change: It does not terminate the program if the GUI can't be
initialized. Instead it returns %FALSE on failure.
This way the application can fall back to some other means of communication
@@ -59910,12 +62384,12 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> Address of the &lt;parameter&gt;argc&lt;/parameter&gt; parameter of your
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> Address of the &lt;parameter&gt;argv&lt;/parameter&gt; parameter of main().
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -59946,7 +62420,7 @@
gtk_window_set_icon_list() allows you to pass in the same icon in
several hand-drawn sizes. The list should contain the natural sizes
-your icon is available in; that is, don't scale the image before
+your icon is available in; that is, don't scale the image before
passing it to GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute,
when the desired final size is known, to allow best quality.
@@ -59961,7 +62435,7 @@
Note that transient windows (those who have been set transient for another
window using gtk_window_set_transient_for()) will inherit their
-icon from their transient parent. So there's no need to explicitly
+icon from their transient parent. So there's no need to explicitly
set the icon on transient windows.
</description>
@@ -60401,6 +62875,8 @@
<function name="gtk_style_ref">
<description>
+Increase the reference count of @style.
+
Deprecated: 2.0: use g_object_ref() instead.
</description>
@@ -60660,7 +63136,7 @@
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="target_list">
@@ -60815,16 +63291,16 @@
<description>
Creates a new #GtkWindow, which is a toplevel window that can
contain other widgets. Nearly always, the type of the window should
-be #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL. If you're implementing something like a
+be #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL. If you're implementing something like a
popup menu from scratch (which is a bad idea, just use #GtkMenu),
you might use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP. #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP is not for
dialogs, though in some other toolkits dialogs are called "popups".
In GTK+, #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP means a pop-up menu or pop-up tooltip.
-On X11, popup windows are not controlled by the &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;.
+On X11, popup windows are not controlled by the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>.
If you simply want an undecorated window (no window borders), use
-gtk_window_set_decorated(), don't use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP.
+gtk_window_set_decorated(), don't use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP.
</description>
@@ -60876,7 +63352,7 @@
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_name">
<description>
Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
-If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be
+If the icon name isn't known, a "broken image" icon will be
displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
will be updated appropriately.
@@ -60959,7 +63435,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_cut_clipboard">
<description>
Copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard, then deletes
-said text if it's editable.
+said text if it's editable.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60997,6 +63473,30 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_storage_type">
+<description>
+Gets the type of representation being used by the icon
+to store image data. If the icon has no image data,
+the return value will be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> image representation being used
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_cell_renderers">
<description>
Return value: a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the
@@ -61203,7 +63703,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to to get the cell renderer's attributes from.
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to to get the cell renderer's attributes from.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="is_expander">
@@ -61259,14 +63759,14 @@
<function name="gtk_style_attach">
<description>
Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the
-colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes
+colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes
it to a particular visual and colormap. The process may
involve the creation of a new style if the style has already
been attached to a window with a different style and colormap.
Since this function may return a new object, you have to use it
in the following way:
-&lt;literal&gt;style = gtk_style_attach (style, window)&lt;/literal&gt;
+<literal>style = gtk_style_attach (style, window)</literal>
</description>
@@ -61282,7 +63782,7 @@
</parameters>
<return> Either @style, or a newly-created #GtkStyle.
If the style is newly created, the style parameter
-will be unref'ed, and the new style will have
+will be unref'ed, and the new style will have
a reference count belonging to the caller.
</return>
</function>
@@ -61511,18 +64011,24 @@
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_progress_new">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_printer_lpi">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellRendererProgress.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="lpi">
+<parameter_description> the resolution in lpi (lines per inch)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new cell renderer
-
-Since: 2.6
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_layout_add_attribute">
@@ -61640,7 +64146,7 @@
Notifies of a change in the global accelerator map.
The path is also used as the detail for the signal,
so it is possible to connect to
-changed::&lt;replaceable&gt;accel_path&lt;/replaceable&gt;.
+changed::<replaceable>accel_path</replaceable>.
Since: 2.4
@@ -61690,7 +64196,7 @@
Flags can be specified by their name, their nickname or
numerically. Multiple flags can be specified in the form
-&lt;literal&gt;"( flag1 | flag2 | ... )"&lt;/literal&gt;.
+<literal>"( flag1 | flag2 | ... )"</literal>.
</description>
@@ -61848,7 +64354,7 @@
<function name="gtk_action_activate">
<description>
-Emits the "activate" signal on the specified action, if it isn't
+Emits the "activate" signal on the specified action, if it isn't
insensitive. This gets called by the proxy widgets when they get
activated.
@@ -61868,13 +64374,13 @@
<function name="gtk_window_set_default">
<description>
-The default widget is the widget that's activated when the user
+The default widget is the widget that's activated when the user
presses Enter in a dialog (for example). This function sets or
unsets the default widget for a #GtkWindow about. When setting
-(rather than unsetting) the default widget it's generally easier to
+(rather than unsetting) the default widget it's generally easier to
call gtk_widget_grab_focus() on the widget. Before making a widget
the default widget, you must set the #GTK_CAN_DEFAULT flag on the
-widget you'd like to make the default using GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS().
+widget you'd like to make the default using GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS().
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -61960,11 +64466,11 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="gicon">
-<parameter_description> place to store a #GIcon
+<parameter_description> place to store a #GIcon, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> place to store an icon size
+<parameter_description> place to store an icon size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -61975,7 +64481,7 @@
<description>
Get the root window where this widget is located. This function can
only be called after the widget has been added to a widget
-heirarchy with #GtkWindow at the top.
+hierarchy with #GtkWindow at the top.
The root window is useful for such purposes as creating a popup
#GdkWindow associated with the window. In general, you should only
@@ -62068,7 +64574,7 @@
Calls gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive() at the cursor
position.
- default_editable indicates the editability of text that doesn't
+ default_editable indicates the editability of text that doesn't
have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the
result of gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
@@ -62103,10 +64609,6 @@
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="void">
-<parameter_description>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> A newly-created HSV color selector.
@@ -62117,7 +64619,7 @@
<function name="gtk_test_create_widget">
<description>
This function wraps g_object_new() for widget types.
-It'll automatically show all created non window widgets, also
+It'll automatically show all created non window widgets, also
g_object_ref_sink() them (to keep them alive across a running test)
and set them up for destruction during the next test teardown phase.
@@ -62214,7 +64716,7 @@
<function name="gtk_text_view_new">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTextView. If you don't call gtk_text_view_set_buffer()
+Creates a new #GtkTextView. If you don't call gtk_text_view_set_buffer()
before using the text view, an empty default buffer will be created
for you. Get the buffer with gtk_text_view_get_buffer(). If you want
to specify your own buffer, consider gtk_text_view_new_with_buffer().
@@ -62321,27 +64823,27 @@
<function name="gtk_hsv_get_color">
<description>
-Queries the current color in an HSV color selector. Returned values will be
-in the [0.0, 1.0] range.
+Queries the current color in an HSV color selector.
+Returned values will be in the [0.0, 1.0] range.
Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="hsv">
-<parameter_description> An HSV color selector.
+<parameter_description> An HSV color selector
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="h">
-<parameter_description> Return value for the hue.
+<parameter_description> Return value for the hue
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="s">
-<parameter_description> Return value for the saturation.
+<parameter_description> Return value for the saturation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="v">
-<parameter_description> Return value for the value.
+<parameter_description> Return value for the value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -62371,7 +64873,7 @@
<return> a new button widget.
Since: 2.6
-Deprecated: 2.14
+Deprecated: 2.14: Use gtk_file_chooser_button_new() instead.
</return>
</function>
@@ -62442,9 +64944,35 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_set_accel_group">
+<description>
+Specifies an @accel_group to add the menu items accelerator to
+(this only applies to stock items so a stock item must already
+be set, make sure to call gtk_image_menu_item_set_use_stock()
+and gtk_menu_item_set_label() with a valid stock item first).
+
+If you want this menu item to have changeable accelerators then
+you shouldnt need this (see gtk_image_menu_item_new_from_stock()).
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image_menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImageMenuItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAccelGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_visited">
<description>
-Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
+Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
was last visited.
@@ -62455,7 +64983,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
+<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
the resource was last visited, or -1 on failure.
Since: 2.10
@@ -62582,8 +65110,8 @@
<function name="gtk_window_set_transient_for">
<description>
Dialog windows should be set transient for the main application
-window they were spawned from. This allows &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window managers&lt;/link&gt; to e.g. keep the
+window they were spawned from. This allows <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window managers</link> to e.g. keep the
dialog on top of the main window, or center the dialog over the
main window. gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience
functions in GTK+ will sometimes call
@@ -62628,6 +65156,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_vertical">
+<description>
+Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_tag">
<description>
Return value: whether @iter is the end of a range tagged with @tag
@@ -62650,7 +65196,7 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_cancel_button">
<description>
-Gets the 'Cancel' button.
+Gets the 'Cancel' button.
</description>
@@ -62660,7 +65206,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkWidget used in the dialog for the 'Cancel' button.
+<return> the #GtkWidget used in the dialog for the 'Cancel' button.
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -62845,7 +65391,7 @@
#GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT flag. Buttons are from left to right,
so the first button in the list will be the leftmost button in the dialog.
-Here's a simple example:
+Here's a simple example:
|[
GtkWidget *dialog = gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons ("My dialog",
main_app_window,
@@ -62927,7 +65473,7 @@
In detail - sets the current locale according to the
program environment. This is the same as calling the C library function
-&lt;literal&gt;setlocale (LC_ALL, "")&lt;/literal&gt; but also takes care of the
+<literal>setlocale (LC_ALL, "")</literal> but also takes care of the
locale specific setup of the windowing system used by GDK.
@@ -63086,7 +65632,7 @@
modified by user preferences for a particular
#GtkSettings. Normally @size would be
#GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU, #GTK_ICON_SIZE_BUTTON, etc. This function
-isn't normally needed, gtk_widget_render_icon() is the usual
+isn't normally needed, gtk_widget_render_icon() is the usual
way to get an icon for rendering, then just look at the size of
the rendered pixbuf. The rendered pixbuf may not even correspond to
the width/height returned by gtk_icon_size_lookup(), because themes
@@ -63124,7 +65670,7 @@
<description>
Converts @child_path to a path relative to @tree_model_sort. That is,
@child_path points to a path in the child model. The returned path will
-point to the same row in the sorted model. If @child_path isn't a valid
+point to the same row in the sorted model. If @child_path isn't a valid
path on the child model, then %NULL is returned.
@@ -63157,6 +65703,24 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scale_set_value_pos">
+<description>
+Sets the position in which the current value is displayed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pos">
+<parameter_description> the position in which the current value is displayed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_item_factory_get_widget">
<description>
Obtains the widget which corresponds to @path.
@@ -63178,7 +65742,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the widget for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't lead
+<return> the widget for the given path, or %NULL if @path doesn't lead
to a widget
</return>
</function>
@@ -63212,7 +65776,7 @@
Flags a widget to have its size renegotiated; should
be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request.
For example, when you change the text in a #GtkLabel, #GtkLabel
-queues a resize to ensure there's enough space for the new text.
+queues a resize to ensure there's enough space for the new text.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -63232,7 +65796,7 @@
Implementations of #GtkCellEditable are responsible for
emitting this signal when they are done editing. It must
be emitted after the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal,
-to give the cell renderer a chance to update the cell's value
+to give the cell renderer a chance to update the cell's value
before the widget is removed.
gtk_cell_editable_remove_widget() is a convenience method
@@ -63366,7 +65930,7 @@
<function name="gtk_widget_set_usize">
<description>
-Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size
+Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size
request will be @width by @height. You can use this function to
force a widget to be either larger or smaller than it is. The
strange "usize" name dates from the early days of GTK+, and derives
@@ -63380,7 +65944,7 @@
Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes,
translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action
-can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
+can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be
correct.
@@ -63477,6 +66041,8 @@
a #GtkLinkButton. This function is called before every callback registered
for the "clicked" signal.
+If no uri hook has been set, GTK+ defaults to calling gtk_show_uri().
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -63542,7 +66108,7 @@
<return> the rendered icon; this may be a newly created icon
or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must not modify
the icon. Use g_object_unref() to release your reference to the
-icon. %NULL if the icon isn't found.
+icon. %NULL if the icon isn't found.
Since: 2.4
</return>
@@ -63568,6 +66134,31 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_stock">
+<description>
+Retrieves the stock id used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
+no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
+pixbuf, icon name or gicon).
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A stock id, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
+wasn't set from a stock id
+
+Since: 2.16
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_widget_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget object. This is an embeddable widget
@@ -63667,26 +66258,27 @@
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_copy_target_list">
+<function name="gtk_activatable_set_related_action">
<description>
-This function returns the list of targets this text buffer can
-provide for copying and as DND source. The targets in the list are
-added with %info values from the #GtkTextBufferTargetInfo enum,
-using gtk_target_list_add_rich_text_targets() and
-gtk_target_list_add_text_targets().
+Sets the related action on the @activatable object.
+
+<note><para>#GtkActivatable implementors need to handle the #GtkActivatable:related-action
+property and call gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action() when it changes.</para></note>
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAction to set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkTargetList
-
-Since: 2.10
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_set_fill_level">
@@ -63699,12 +66291,12 @@
would indicate the current play position, and the fill level would
be the position up to which the file/stream has been downloaded.
-This amount of prebuffering can be displayed on the range's trough
+This amount of prebuffering can be displayed on the range's trough
and is themeable separately from the trough. To enable fill level
display, use gtk_range_set_show_fill_level(). The range defaults
to not showing the fill level.
-Additionally, it's possible to restrict the range's slider position
+Additionally, it's possible to restrict the range's slider position
to values which are smaller than the fill level. This is controller
by gtk_range_set_restrict_to_fill_level() and is by default
enabled.
@@ -63814,7 +66406,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that should be used as the button's icon.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="callback">
@@ -63903,9 +66495,9 @@
Rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
the event signals on a widget (those signals should never
be emitted without using this function to do so).
-If you want to synthesize an event though, don't use this function;
+If you want to synthesize an event though, don't use this function;
instead, use gtk_main_do_event() so the event will behave as if
-it were in the event queue. Don't synthesize expose events; instead,
+it were in the event queue. Don't synthesize expose events; instead,
use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() to invalidate a region of the
window.
@@ -64089,23 +66681,23 @@
<function name="gtk_window_set_keep_below">
<description>
Asks to keep @window below, so that it stays in bottom. Note that
-you shouldn't assume the window is definitely below afterward,
-because other entities (e.g. the user or &lt;link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch"&gt;window manager&lt;/link&gt;) could not keep it below,
+you shouldn't assume the window is definitely below afterward,
+because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could not keep it below,
and not all window managers support putting windows below. But
-normally the window will be kept below. Just don't write code
+normally the window will be kept below. Just don't write code
that crashes if not.
-It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
+It's permitted to call this function before showing a window,
in which case the window will be kept below when it appears onscreen
initially.
You can track the below state via the "window-state-event" signal
on #GtkWidget.
-Note that, according to the &lt;ulink
-url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec"&gt;Extended Window
-Manager Hints&lt;/ulink&gt; specification, the above state is mainly meant
+Note that, according to the <ulink
+url="http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec">Extended Window
+Manager Hints</ulink> specification, the above state is mainly meant
for user preferences and should not be used by applications e.g. for
drawing attention to their dialogs.
@@ -64127,7 +66719,7 @@
<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_sort_column_changed">
<description>
-Emits a GtkTreeSortable::sort_column_changed signal on
+Emits a #GtkTreeSortable::sort-column-changed signal on @sortable.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -64174,7 +66766,7 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_state">
<description>
Obtains the widget state this icon source applies to. The return
-value is only useful/meaningful if the widget state is &lt;emphasis&gt;not&lt;/emphasis&gt;
+value is only useful/meaningful if the widget state is <emphasis>not</emphasis>
wildcarded.
@@ -64231,7 +66823,8 @@
<function name="gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_dest">
<description>
-Turns @icon_view into a drop destination for automatic DND.
+Turns @icon_view into a drop destination for automatic DND. Calling this
+method sets #GtkIconView:reorderable to %FALSE.
Since: 2.8
@@ -64270,23 +66863,23 @@
if you are calling gtk_parse_args(), gtk_init_check(),
gtk_init_with_args() or g_option_context_parse() with
the option group returned by gtk_get_option_group(), you
-&lt;emphasis&gt;don't&lt;/emphasis&gt; have to call gtk_init().
+<emphasis>don't</emphasis> have to call gtk_init().
-&lt;note&gt;&lt;para&gt;
+<note><para>
This function will terminate your program if it was unable to initialize
the GUI for some reason. If you want your program to fall back to a
textual interface you want to call gtk_init_check() instead.
-&lt;/para&gt;&lt;/note&gt;
+</para></note>
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> Address of the &lt;parameter&gt;argc&lt;/parameter&gt; parameter of your
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> Address of the &lt;parameter&gt;argv&lt;/parameter&gt; parameter of main().
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -64298,7 +66891,7 @@
<description>
If you only plan to have simple (text-only) tooltips on full items, you
can use this function to have #GtkIconView handle these automatically
-for you. @column should be set to the column in @icon_view's model
+for you. @column should be set to the column in @icon_view's model
containing the tooltip texts, or -1 to disable this feature.
When enabled, #GtkWidget::has-tooltip will be set to %TRUE and
@@ -64313,7 +66906,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> an integer, which is a valid column number for @icon_view's model
+<parameter_description> an integer, which is a valid column number for @icon_view's model
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -64347,12 +66940,42 @@
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_text">
+<description>
+Sets @tooltip as the contents of the tooltip for the icon
+at the specified position.
+
+Use %NULL for @tooltip to remove an existing tooltip.
+
+See also gtk_widget_set_tooltip_text() and
+gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_markup().
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> the icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for the icon, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_chars">
<description>
Moves @count characters backward, if possible (if @count would move
past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
-onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
+onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
the function does nothing and returns %FALSE.
@@ -64482,7 +67105,7 @@
Since multiple proxies may independently trigger the installation
of the accelerator, the @action counts the number of times this
-function has been called and doesn't remove the accelerator until
+function has been called and doesn't remove the accelerator until
gtk_action_disconnect_accelerator() has been called as many times.
Since: 2.4
@@ -64500,7 +67123,7 @@
<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_family_list">
<description>
This returns the #GtkTreeView that lists font families, for
-example, 'Sans', 'Serif', etc.
+example, 'Sans', 'Serif', etc.
</description>
@@ -64510,7 +67133,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkWidget.
+<return> A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
Since: 2.14
</return>
@@ -64548,8 +67171,8 @@
<description>
Causes @widget to become the default widget. @widget must have the
%GTK_CAN_DEFAULT flag set; typically you have to set this flag
-yourself by calling &lt;literal&gt;GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS (@widget,
-GTK_CAN_DEFAULT)&lt;/literal&gt;. The default widget is activated when
+yourself by calling <literal>GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS (@widget,
+GTK_CAN_DEFAULT)</literal>. The default widget is activated when
the user presses Enter in a window. Default widgets must be
activatable, that is, gtk_widget_activate() should affect them.
@@ -64577,7 +67200,7 @@
<function name="gtk_statusbar_push">
<description>
-Pushes a new message onto a statusbar's stack.
+Pushes a new message onto a statusbar's stack.
</description>
@@ -64587,7 +67210,7 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="context_id">
-<parameter_description> the message's context id, as returned by
+<parameter_description> the message's context id, as returned by
gtk_statusbar_get_context_id()
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
@@ -64630,7 +67253,7 @@
client may be in the same process or in a different process.
To embed a #GtkPlug in a #GtkSocket, you can either create the
-#GtkPlug with &lt;literal&gt;gtk_plug_new (0)&lt;/literal&gt;, call
+#GtkPlug with <literal>gtk_plug_new (0)</literal>, call
gtk_plug_get_id() to get the window ID of the plug, and then pass that to the
gtk_socket_add_id(), or you can call gtk_socket_get_id() to get the
window ID for the socket, and call gtk_plug_new() passing in that
@@ -64675,7 +67298,7 @@
<function name="gtk_editable_delete_selection">
<description>
Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
-This call will not do anything if there is no selected text.
+This call doesn't do anything if there is no selected text.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -64815,7 +67438,7 @@
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_remove_shortcut_folder_uri">
<description>
-Removes a folder URI from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
+Removes a folder URI from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
</description>
@@ -64842,6 +67465,32 @@
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_resolution_xy">
+<description>
+Sets the values of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION,
+%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X and
+%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="resolution_x">
+<parameter_description> the horizontal resolution in dpi
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="resolution_y">
+<parameter_description> the vertical resolution in dpi
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_indices">
<description>
Return value: The current indices, or %NULL.
@@ -64964,11 +67613,11 @@
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> location to store a #GtkIconSet
+<parameter_description> location to store a #GtkIconSet, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> location to store a stock icon size
+<parameter_description> location to store a stock icon size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
[
Date Prev][
Date Next] [
Thread Prev][
Thread Next]
[
Thread Index]
[
Date Index]
[
Author Index]
